home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. About Future Wave Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Future Wave Editor (FWE) is a text editor for OS/2 Warp 3.0 and later. FWE
- enables you to work on the development of a professional program as well as
- edit a simple text file such as Config.Sys. It is a highly-functional text
- editor which allows you to write macros in the REXX language. Try FWE if you
- are not happy with the operational efficiency and simplicity of other OS/2 text
- editors.
-
- FWE is a shareware. It is offered for a trial period of 60 days or under. If
- you would like to continue using FWE, please purchase the licence.
-
- Basic features:
-
- The file size is unlimited. (Up to 10,000,000 lines can be edited.)
- You can edit 12 files at the same time.
- You can read / write files with the EUC and the JIS codes.
- Unlimited UNDO and REDO.
- grep. (a function to search for strings in multiple files)
- Regular expressions can be used in Search, Replace, and grep.
- Powerfully customizable. (Environment, Key Assignment, Keyword Setting)
- A function to activate external programs.
- Help features of APIs can be displayed with the Help of Toolkit, etc.
- The History function stores the search strings and the names of
- previous files.
- The environments can be automatically changed by file extensions.
- (Configuration)
- Powerful support for program development: displays a list of functions,
- jumps to corresponding parentheses.
- Powerful macros in the REXX language.
- Specify a path by utilizing the environment variables.
- Many more features are available. (See Features List)
-
- Pleaes refer to Installing FWE for installation / Uninstalling FWE for
- uninstallation. When you use FWE for the first time after the installation,
- refer to Starting FWE.
-
- You may feel uncomfortable with the starting time if you are a frequent user
- of FWE. FWE has Resident Mode for the program to shorten the starting time.
- You can turn on/off Resident Mode and save the command by selecting Resident
- in the Options menu. If you use FWE frequently, turn on Resident and put FWE
- in the Startup Folder of OS/2 with the /ICON option designated. Refer to
- Program Options for the options when starting FWE.
-
- A temporary file starting with Fwe is created in the directory specified by
- the TMP environment variables. This file will be automatically deleted when
- the program is terminated. If the file stays in the disk with an abnormal
- termination, delete the file manually.
-
- Refer to Files List for the files contained in the FWE archive. Refer to
- Restrictions of this version for recognized problems and restrictions.
-
- The author and any and all others involved in the creation of this product
- will not accept responsibility for any damage that may result from the use of
- FWE. Its action is not assured in all environments.
-
- FWE is released at
- Internet Future Wave Limited (http://www.futurewave.co.jp)
-
-
- For inquiries:
- Internet takeda@futurewave.co.jp
-
- (C) Copyright Future Wave Limited 1996-1999. All right reserved.
-
- JRE.DLL: (C) Kazuo Yamada SGQ02500@nifty.ne.jp
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Files List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The following files are included in the FWE archive.
-
- Execute Module
- Fwe.Exe
- FweComp.DLL
- FweFile.DLL
- FweGrep.DLL
- FweIm.DLL
- FweJpn.DLL
- FweMcr.DLL
- FweMle.DLL
- FwePrn.DLL
- FweRuntm.DLL
- FweSet.DLL
- FweStr.DLL
- FweIcons.DLL
-
- Regular Expression (by Mr. Kazuo Yamada)
- JRE32.DLL
- README.JRE
-
- Help File
- FweJpn.Hlp
-
- Setting Files
- Fwe.Ini Configuration file
- Fwe.Env Environment setting file
- Fwe.Key FWE standard key assignment (for execution)
- WinLike.Key Windows-like key assignment (for execution)
- WdSrLike.Key WordStar-like key assignment (for execution)
-
- Keyword Definition Files
- FweC.Kwd/.Lng For the C / C++ languages
- FweJava.Kwd/.Lng For the Java language
- FwePas.Kwd/.Lng For the Pascal language
- FweBas.Kwd/.Lng For the Basic language
- FweRexx.Kwd/.Lng For the REXX / FWE macro languages
- FweOtr1.Kwd/.Lng Other 1
- FweOtr2.Kwd/.Lng Other 2
- Fwe.Kwd/.Lng Standard
-
- Sample Macro
- Compile.Mac Invokes compilers
- InpDate.Mac Inputs system date
- InpTime.Mac Inputs system time
- Split.Mac Aligns text
-
- Files for definition of initial key assignment (for Help for key assignment)
- Fwe.Txt Text for FWE standard key assignment
- WinLike.Txt Text for Windows-like key assignment
- WdSrLike.Txt Text for WordStar-like key assignment
-
- Setup Program
- FweInst.Exe FWE Setup program
- FweReg.Fnc
- FweDeReg.Fnc
-
- Other
- Readme.1st
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Installing / Uninstalling FWE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- As FWE updates OS2.INI and Config.SYS, please make sure to follow the
- instructions for installation / uninstallation.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. Installing FWE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Use the Setup program (FweInst.EXE) to install FWE. The Setup program
- updates OS2.INI and Config.SYS files. Make sure those files are writable.
-
- You can keep the current environment after the installation. If the same
- files exist during installation, you will see a message to ask you if you want
- to overwrite them. Select No, or make a backup copy of the environment setting
- files such as FWE.ENV before installation. Then overwrite some files with the
- backup copy once the installation is completed. Refer to Files List for the
- files included in the FWE archive.
-
- Follow the instructions below when installing FWE.
-
- 1. Make sure the earlier version of FWE is not active. Close it if it is
- active. The resident option has to be turned off to finish the
- program. Open the minimized folder to make sure any FWE programs are
- not active.
-
- 2. Uninstall the earlier version of FWE if you are installing the new
- version in another directory. (See Uninstalling FWE) Please make sure
- to follow the instructions to uninstall FWE because with a manual
- uninstallation some environment information stays in Config.Sys and
- OS2.INI. If you are installing the new version in the same directory,
- you don't have to worry about this.
-
- 3. Activate FweInst.EXE from within a directory where FWE is not to be
- installed.
-
- 4. When the Setup program is activated, it specifies a directory and
- starts installing FWE.
-
- 5. Edit Config.Sys to add the FWE environment variables if needed.
-
- 6. Reset the system to restart when the installation is finished.
-
- When you use FWE for the first time after the installation, make some
- changes in the settings, refferred to in Starting FWE.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. Uninstalling FWE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Use the Uninstall program (FweInst.EXE) to uninstall FWE. The Uninstall
- program updates OS2.INI and Config.SYS files. Make sure those files are
- writable.
-
- Follow the instructions below when uninstalling FWE.
-
- 1. Activate FweInst.EXE from within a directory where FWE was not installed.
-
- 2. When the Setup program is activated, select the Uninstall button to start
- the uninstallation.
-
- 3. If you activate FweInst.EXE from within the directory with FWE installed,
- some files will stay undeleted. In this case, delete the files manually.
-
- 4. Delete the FWE environment variables if they were added in Config.Sys.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Starting FWE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You need to make some changes in settings to make FWE a more user-friendly
- editor. However, FWE has such a great number of setting items that you may
- wonder where to start. Here are some tips that may be of help to new users in
- making some useful settings.
-
- 1. Select Configuration in the "Options" menu to display the dialog box for
- "Key Assignment". Select a key assignment you want to use from a choice
- of FWE Standard, Vz-like, WordStar-like, and Windows-like, and you can
- save it. (Adjust the FWE key operation to the one of an editor familiar
- to you.)
-
- 2. Select Environment in the "Options" menu to change and save settings of
- the window display, the color, the font, the cursor movement, the file
- sharing, the backup, and other basic parameters. When you save the
- change, you will see a dialog box asking you where you want to save it.
- Press "OK" and save it in the standard environment. (Adjust FWE to
- display and work like the editor you are familiar with.)
-
- 3. Configure the keyword settings to change the color of the keywords and to
- work on a program development. When you want to change the color of the
- keywords, click on the "Keywords" in the "Options" menu and select
- "Default". When you work on a program development, click on the
- "Keywords" in the "Options" menu and select your desired language. (Make
- the screen easier to work on.)
-
- 4. If you want to execute other programs from FWE, select Setting Execute
- Programs in the "Options" menu and specify the items. The specified
- items will be added in the "Options" menu. (Make FWE a simple shell.)
-
- 5. Edit a simple file as an example. If you don't like the key behaviour,
- change the values in Key assignment in the "Options" menu. (Adjust FWE to
- work more like the editor you are familiar with.)
-
- You will need to know about other FWE features to make full use of FWE.
- Please check the items in the Features List.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Restrictions of this version ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This version has some restrictions and minor problems, though the next
- version will be adjusted accordingly. Please understand the following
- restrictions and problems.
-
- When you run a PC-DOS program while executing FWE macros, set
- "IDLE_SENSITIVITY" under 40 in the DOS setting. (Default:75)
-
- When the keyword setting is on, FWE cannot identify a string or a
- comment in multiple lines. It identifies by a physical line.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Registration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This is a shareware program. The registration cost is 40.00US$.
-
- For registration:
- If you like this software, please transfer your payment by undersigned
- method after making the sufficient evaluation of this software.
-
- BMT Micro
-
- BMT Micro Secure on-line registration of this program
- (https://secure.falcon-net.net/BMT/order1275.html)
-
- Offline Order Form (Please use BMTMICRO.TXT in this program.)
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Program Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The following are the options at the start of FWE. You can also use them as
- arguments to specify a file or a path.
-
- Syntax
- Fwe.Exe [/option][file1][file2]....]
-
- Options
-
- /ICON
- Minimizes the window to an icon when FWE starts up. This option is
- useful when the program is resident.
-
- /C:n
- Jumps the cursor to the specified column when FWE starts up. Specify a
- column number by n (Default:1). A column number is recognized as a
- physical column number, not as a logical column number. This option is
- effective in regard to all the files opened when FWE starts up. This
- option is ignored if a directory is specified in the Program Options.
-
- /L:n
- Jumps the cursor to the specified line when FWE starts up. Specify a
- line number by n (Default:1). When you assign -1 to a line number n,
- the cursor jumps to the last line of the opened file. A line number is
- recognized as a physical line number, not as a logical line number.
- This option is effective in regard to all the files opened when FWE
- starts up. This option is ignored if a directory is specified in the
- Program Options.
-
- /NoEdit
- Opens a file which cannot be edited. This option is effective in
- regard to all the files opened when FWE starts up. This option is
- ignored if a directory or a new file is specified in the Program
- Options.
-
- /M:macro-file
- Excutes the specified macros when FWE starts up. This option is
- effective in regard to all the files opened when FWE starts up. This
- option is ignored if a directory or a new file is specified in the
- Program Options.
-
- /A:"macro-args"
- Specifies arguments to start the macros which you want to excute when
- FWE starts up. This option is effective in regard to all the files
- opened when FWE starts up. This option is ignored if a directory or a
- new file is specified in the Program Options and if any macros are not
- specified to be excuted.
-
- Specifying a file and a path
-
- Specifying a file
- Multiple files can be specified by using a blank space to separate
- them. You can edit the specified files when FWE starts up. You can
- specify wildcards in files. You can edit all the files that the
- wildcards match.
-
- Specifying a path
- You can specify a path with files or alone. When a path is specified,
- an open dialog box is displayed accordingly at the start of FWE.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE enables you to assign most of its functions to short-cut keys (use "Key
- Assignment") and to tool bars or popup menus (use "Environment"). However, if
- you don't want to be bothered with customizing the key assignments, you can
- simply use the menus. Most of the functions of FWE can be accessed from the
- menus.
-
- Select the menu you want to refer to from the following:
-
- File
- Edit
- Search
- Macro
- Window
- Option
- Help
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1. File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- New
- Opens a new file to edit.
-
- Open
- This is a submenu containing the following:
-
- Open
- Opens another file (another FWE) to edit.
-
- Import
- Opens the specified file at the cursor position.
-
- Reload
- Reopens the current file. You can use this function when you edit
- the FWE file in another program.
-
- Close and open
- Closes the current file and opens a new file in the same window.
-
- Add to ring
- Adds a file to the ring.
-
- Save
- Saves the current file under the same field. You can continue to edit
- the file.
-
- Save as
- Saves the current file and gives it a new filename.
-
- Forced save
- Forces FWE to save the current file under the same field.
-
- Disable edit
- Disables you from editing the current file.
-
- Character code
- Specifies the character code for the current file when it is saved. In
- most cases, the character code specified for the opened file is used when
- it is saved. SHIFT JIS is used for new files. If EUS or JIS Auto Select
- cannot read a text, you can still specify another character code to open
- the text.
-
- Print
- Prints the current file. You can also display the print preview image
- before printing.
-
- Save and Exit
- Saves the current file and closes the window. This function cannot be
- recorded by "Record key macro".
-
- Exit
- Exits from the current file. If there are any changes in the file, FWE
- will ask you if you want to save the changes. This function cannot be
- recorded by "Record key macro".
-
- All FWEs
- This is a submenu containing the following. They control all the FWE
- files.
-
- Save
- Saves all the files you are editing.
-
- Save and Exit
- Saves all the files you are editing and closes them. This function
- cannot be recorded by "Record key macro".
-
- Exit
- Exits all the files you are editing. If there are any changes in
- the files, FWE will ask you if you want to save the changes. This
- function cannot be recorded by "Record key macro".
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2. Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Undo all
- Undoes all the changes you made and goes back to the original file. You
- cannot redo this edit.
-
- Undo
- Undoes the previous editing change.
-
- Redo
- Redoes the change that has been undone previously.
-
- Cut
- Cuts the selected text to the clipboard. The text will be deleted from
- the file. In most cases, lines and blocks are cut to the clipboard in the
- same way. When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor
- position is cut to the clipboard. (This default command can be turned
- off in the "Other" page of "Environment.")
-
- Copy
- Copies the selected text to the clipboard. In most cases, lines and
- blocks are copied to the clipboard in the same way. When no text is
- selected, the line that contains the cursor position is copied to the
- clipboard. (This default command can be turned off in the "Other" page
- of "Environment.")
-
- Paste
- Pastes the text that is in the clipboard into your file, inserting it at
- the cursor position. In most cases, lines and blocks are pasted in the
- same way.
-
- Delete
- Deletes the selected text from the current file. In most cases, lines
- and blocks are deleted in the same way.
-
- Cut for append
- Cuts the selected text and appends it to the end of the clipboard. The
- text will be deleted from the file. You cannot append selected blocks.
- They are cut to the clipboard, replacing any existing clipboard contents.
- When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is
- cut and appended to the clipboard. (This default command can be turned
- off in the "Other" page of "Environment.")
-
- Copy for append
- Copies the selected text and appends it to the end of the clipboard. You
- cannot append selected blocks. They are copied to the clipboard,
- replacing any existing clipboard contents. When no text is selected, the
- line that contains the cursor position is copied and appended to the
- clipboard. (This default command can be turned off in the "Other" page of
- "Environment.")
-
- Copy with quotation mark
- Copies the selected text to the clipboard, embedding a quotation mark on
- top of each line. In most cases, lines and blocks are copied to the
- clipboard in the same way. You can customize the quotation mark in the
- "Other" page of "Environment" When no text is selected, the line that
- contains the cursor position is copied to the clipboard. (This default
- command can be turned off in the "Other" page of "Environment.")
-
- Paste with quotation mark
- Pastes the text that is in the clipboard into your file, embedding a
- quotation mark on top of each line. In most cases, lines and blocks are
- pasted in the same way. You can customize the quotation mark in the
- "Other" page of "Environment".
-
- Insert quotation mark
- Inserts a quotation mark on top of the line that contains the cursor
- position. When a text is selected, a quotation mark is inserted on top of
- each line in the text. You can customize the quotation mark in the
- "Other" page of "Environment".
-
- Convert
- Converts the following:
-
- To lower case
- Converts uppercase characters in a selected portion of your file to
- lowercase characters. When no text is selected, the word that
- contains the cursor position is converted. (You can change the
- default to convert only the part of the word after the cursor
- position in the "Other" page of "Environment".)
-
- To upper case
- Converts lowercase characters in a selected portion of your file to
- uppercase characters. When no text is selected, the word that
- contains the cursor position is converted. (You can change the
- default to convert only the part of the word after the cursor
- position in the "Other" page of "Environment".)
-
- Toggle case
- Switches the first letter of the selected text to a lowercase
- character / an uppercase character and accords all the letters of
- the word that contains the cursor position to the case character
- you switch the first letter to. When no text is selected, the word
- that contains the cursor position is converted. (You can change the
- default to convert the part of the word after the cursor position
- in the "Other" page of "Environment".)
-
- Fill
- Fills the selected text with copies of the specified character.
-
- Input hex code
- Inputs the control codes (01h - 1Fh) at the cursor position.
-
- Select all
- Selects the entire file you are working on.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3. Search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Find
- Displays the Find Dialog Box. Specify a search string to execute the
- command.
-
- Find previous
- Searches in the part of the text above the cursor position. When no
- search string is specified, it displays the Find Dialog Box.
-
- Find Next
- Searches in the part of the text after the cursor position. When no
- search string is specified, it displays the Find Dialog Box.
-
- Replace
- Displays the Replace Dialog Box. Specify a replace string to execute the
- command.
-
- Jump to page
- Displays the dialog box to put the page number in, and jumps to the
- specified page. This is available only when "edit by page" is selected
- in the "Window" page of "Environment".
-
- Jump to line
- Displays the dialog box to put the line number in, and jumps to the
- specified line. When "Edit by page" is selected, it jumps to the
- specified line of the page containing the cursor position. The line
- numbers are counted according to the setting for the line number in the
- "Window" page of "Environment".
-
- Top of file
- Moves the cursor to the top of the file.
-
- Bottom of file
- Moves the cursor to the bottom of the file.
-
- Marking cursor position
- Marks the current cursor position. You can jump back to the marked
- cursor position using the following [Jump to marking position] command.
-
- Jump to marking position
- Jumps to the cursor position marked by the [Marking cursor position]
- command.
-
- Tag jump
- Executes tag jump according to the tag information of the current line.
-
- grep
- Executes grep. The result will be displayed in another FWE window.
-
- Post it
- This is a submenu containing the following:
-
- List
- Lists all the lines starting with "Post it string" specified in the
- "Other" page of "Environment".
-
- Previous
- Moves to the "Post it string" positioned above the cursor.
-
- Next
- Moves to the "Post it string" positioned after the cursor.
-
- Function(s)
- This is a submenu containing the following search functions. Some
- settings need to be configured before you use the functions. Refer to
- the function search section for the configuration.
-
- List
- Lists all the functions in the current file.
-
- Previous
- Moves to the functions shown above the cursor position.
-
- Next
- Moves to the functions shown after the cursor position.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4. Macro ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Redo the previous command
- Redoes the previous command. Only the commands that can be recorded by
- the following "Record key macro" can be executed.
-
- Record key macro
- Starts/stops recording the contents of the key operations. The recorded
- contents can be used by [Play key macro].
-
- Play key macro
- Plays the contents recorded by [Record key macro].
-
- Save key macro
- Saves the contents recorded by [Record key macro] in a file.
-
- Load key macro
- Loads the contents saved in the file by [Save key macro].
-
- Execute Rexx macro
- Executes FWE macros written in the REXX language. Select a macro you
- want to execute from the open dialog box, and a dialog box will be
- displayed to put a macro argument in. If you don't want the dialog box
- for macro arguments displayed, select "Do not input macro argument" in
- the "Window" page of "Environment".
-
- Terminate macro
- Terminates the FWE macros in execution. If the macros are on semaphore
- or I/O standby, they may not be terminated and an alarm goes off.
-
- Registration Rexx macro
- Registers the FWE macros written in the REXX languages.
-
- (* The functions shown on this page cannot be recorded by [Record key macro].
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.5. Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Previous FWE
- Changes to the previous FWE window. This function cannot be recorded by
- Record key macro.
-
- Next FWE
- Changes to the next (in a Z order) FWE window. This function cannot be
- recorded by Record key macro.
-
- List
- Displays the list of the currently active FWE windows. Selecting from
- the list enables you to change the current window to another window.
-
- Change ring
- Changes to the next file in the ring.
-
- Scroll with other FWE
- Scrolls with other active FWE windows.
-
- Compare with other FWE
- Compares the content of a file with those of other active FWE windows.
-
- Continue compare
- Continues to compare the content starting with the line next to the
- cursor position when [Compare with other FWE] is executed in another
- position with the jump option.
-
- Cascade
- Cascades the windows based on the value which is set in the "Window" page
- of "Environment".
-
- Icon
- Minimizes all the active windows to icons.
-
- Save desktop
- Saves all the information of the windows on the desktop. The saved
- information can be restored by the following [Restore desktop]. This
- function cannot be recorded by Record key macro.
-
- Restore desktop
- Restores the information saved by [Save desktop]. This function cannot
- be recorded by Record key macro.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6. Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Registration on memory
- Turns on/off the resident mode.
-
- Environment
- Configures the environment.
-
- Key assignment
- Configures the key assignments.
-
- Keywords
- Configures the keywords displayed according to the identification. The
- keywords can be configured by the following:
-
- Current keywords
- Configures the keywords displayed according to the identification.
- The keywords can be configured by current using.
-
- C/C++
- Configures the keywords identified when editing the C/C++ language.
-
- Java
- Configures the keywords identified when editing the Java language.
-
- Pascal
- Configures the keywords identified when editing the Pascal
- language.
-
- Basic
- Configures the keywords identified when editing the Basic language.
-
- REXX
- Configures the keywords identified when editing the REXX language.
-
- Other 1, Other 2
- Configures the keywords identified when editing other languages.
-
- Default
- Configures the keywords identified with the default.
-
- User
- Configures/Delete the keywords identified when editing the user
- defined keyword.
-
- Execute programs
- Sets the external programs you want to execute.
-
- Configuration
- Configures the environment and the key assignment for each extension.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.7. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Contents
- Displays the contents of Help.
-
- General help
- Displays the help file.
-
- Macro
- Displays the macro help file.
-
- Help on help
- Displays information on how to use Help.
-
- Product information
- Displays the FWE product information.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can configure the environment by selecting Environment from the "Option"
- menu. By configuring the environment, you can change the window appearance,
- the cursor shape, and so on, to work like those of the editor you are familiar
- with. You can configure the parameters on each page by selecting the tabs.
- When a tab contains multiple pages, you will see the page number 1/n in the top
- right corner of the page. Make sure to configure all the parameters you need
- in each page.
-
- "Environment" contains the following tabs:
-
- Window
- Cursor
- Color
- Font
- File
- Toolbar
- Popup menu
- Other
-
- Each button in the "Environment" dialog boxes controls the following:
-
- Test
- Displays the content set in the "Color" page, only in the window from
- which the "Environment" dialog box was opened without finishing the
- setting operation.
-
- Apply
- Applies the changes you have made only to the window from which the
- "Environment" dialog box was opened.
-
- Save
- Displays a dialog box to ask you if you want to save the changes you
- have made and applies the changes to all the active windows opened with
- the same configuration file.
-
- Cancel
- Cancels the changes you have made.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1. Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- In this tab, you can configure the parameters for the window appearance.
- This tab contains three pages. Configure the parameters in all of the three
- pages.
-
- Set margin to window-left
- Displays a margin area to the left of the document window. When this
- function is in effect, you can see the letters in the first column clearly.
- When the line numbers are displayed, a margin area is inserted between the
- line numbers and the text.
-
- Display keywords
- Displays the specified strings and words in different colors than the one
- for the document. The keywords can be registered in "Keywords" of the
- "Option" menu.
-
- Display ruler
- Displays a ruler (a column gauge) to indicate the cursor position. Select
- a display position from the following:
-
- Top of window
- Displays a ruler on the top of the window.
-
- Bottom of window
- Displays a ruler on the bottom of the window.
-
- Display line number
- Displays the line numbers on the left side of the window. Select a count
- method for the line numbers from the following:
-
- Word processor-like
- Counts all the lines (including the lines wrapped to the next lines.)
-
- Editor-like
- Counts only the carriage return characters.
-
- Display carriage return character
- Displays the carriage return characters in the text. When this function is
- active, the carriage return characters are displayed using the characters
- specified in "Special characters" on the third page of this tab. Some
- characters are not displayed or replaced by other characters when you are
- using certain pictorial fonts. The return characters can also be displayed
- in a different color than the one of the text. Refer to the "Color" pages
- for the colors of the display.
-
- Display TAB character
- Displays the TAB characters in the text.
-
- Broaden line spacing
- When the line spacings are too narrow, you can select this option. Specify
- the line spacing in the following.
-
- Line spacing
- You can select the line spacing from the size of the current font, one
- half of the font size, 1/3 of the font size, and 1/4 of the font size.
-
- Scroll bar
- Configures a way of displaying a scroll bar. The following are the scroll
- bars you can select to display:*
-
- Vertical scroll bar
- Displays a vertical scroll bar.
-
- Horizontal scroll bar
- Displays a horizontal scroll bar.
-
-
- == Page 2/3 ==
-
- Word wrap
- Specifies the logical number of digits for a line. You can configure the
- following:
-
- Window size
- Specifies that the text wraps to the next line when it reaches the
- sides of the window. If this option is not selected, the text wraps to
- the next line when it reaches the column number specified in the next
- option. The line in which the text is wrapped to the next line with
- this option is called the logical line in FWE.
-
- Wrap line
- Displays a vertical line on the column specified for the text to wrap
- to the next line. When this option is selected, the line is displayed
- in the color specified in "line number" of the "Color" page.
-
- Tab setting
- Specifies the number of digits for a tab. You have a choice of 2 digits, 4
- digits, and 8 digits for a tab. Select "Use blank" to fill the digits for
- a tab with the blanks instead of the tab characters. When you select
- blanks to fill the digits, all the tab characters in the file will be
- replaced by blanks. You need to reread the file when you want this option
- to work on the opened file.
-
- Initial window size
- Specifies the size of the initial windows. Select the initial size from
- the following:
-
- Default size
- Uses the default size and position of the OS/2 Presentation Manager.
-
- Last window size
- Recalls the size and position of the preceding editing window.
-
- Specified size
- Displays a window in the specified position according to the specified
- column and line numbers. Specify the position on the screen to display
- the window.
-
-
- == Page 3/3 ==
-
- Function keys
- Displays the function keys and specifies the number of the keys to display.
- When this option is selected, the function keys are displayed as buttons
- above the status line. The text of the function keys is displayed in the
- same color as the one of the cursor position on the status line.
-
- Save directory when exit
- Saves the current directory when you exit FWE. The saved directory will be
- restored as the current directory when FWE is initiated again.
-
- Limit Undo
- As the default, there is no limitation for the levels of changes that can
- be undone. Select this option when the amount of disk storage is small or
- when you don't want to be bothered by swapping the undo data into disk
- storage. When this option is selected, FWE can undo up to 30 levels of
- changes.
-
- Display message box for error
- Displays all the errors with message boxes. When this option is not
- selected, minor errors are displayed on the status line.
-
- Do not input macro argument
- With this option in effect, the dialog box for a macro argument is not
- displayed when you execute a macro.
-
- Edit by the page
- Enables you to edit the text by the page aligned by the number of pages.
- Specify the number of lines for a page. Select "Display page break" to
- display lines for the page breaks in the editing window. The lines are
- displayed in the same color as the one of the line numbers.
-
- Special characters
- Specifies characters to be used when the carriage returns and the tabs are
- displayed. The specified characters are used when [Display carriage return
- character] or [Display TAB character] is selected on the first page.
-
- Color
- Displays the tab characters in the same color as the one of EOL/EOF.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2. Cursor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- In this tab, you can configure the parameters for the cursor appearance and
- movement. This tab contains three pages. Configure the parameters in all of
- the three pages.
-
- Free cursor
- Enables a cursor to move beyond the carriage return characters. When this
- option is not selected, a cursor can't move beyond the carriage return
- characters.
-
- Virtual free cursor
- Enables a cursor to move beyond the carriage return characters only when
- the cursor moves up or down.
-
- Do not move line top <=> line end
- Inhibits a cursor from moving from the end of the line to the top of the
- line (or from the top to the end).
-
- Move with key repeat
- Moves a cursor as many times as the key strokes. Turn off this option if
- you want to stop the cursor movement after the key strokes.
-
- Do not precede scroll
- Normally FWE starts scrolling a little ahead of the displayed window.
- Select this option when you don't want a normal scroll.
-
- Auto indent
- Indents automatically when you start a new line. The same character as the
- one for the previous line (blank/tab) is used for the indent character.
-
- Use tab for indent
- Uses a tab character when indenting a line.
-
- Indent blank line
- Normally FWE doesn't indent a line when the new line is blank or only
- with tab characters. You can turn off the default by selecting this
- option.
-
- Move cursor to one line below when tag jump
- Moves a cursor to one line below after you execute a tag jump.
-
- Toggle tab with typing mode
- Toggles a tab according to the typing mode (overwrite/insert). With the
- overwrite mode, the cursor moves to the right as many digits as the tab
- characters. With the insert mode, the tab characters are inserted at the
- cursor position.
-
- Save cursor position when exit
- Saves the cursor position when you exit the editing FWE. The saved cursor
- position will be restored when you open the FWE file again. Only the files
- listed in the file menu (saved in the open-history file) can be restored
- with the saved cursor position.
-
-
- == Page 2/3 ==
-
- Cursor Display
- Configures the display of the cursor as following:
-
- Blinking
- Displays a blinking cursor.
-
- Underline
- Underlines the text of the line that contains the cursor position.
-
- Color cursor line
- Colors the text of the line that contains the cursor position with the
- specified color. Specify the color in the "Color" page.
-
- Cursor mode at start up
- Specifies the cursor mode (the typing mode: overwrite/insert) when FWE
- starts up.
-
- Cursor shape
- Specifies the cursor shape from the following:
-
- I type
- Uses a I-beam cursor with the insert mode and a box cursor with the
- overwrite mode.
-
- _ type
- Uses a _ cursor with the insert mode and a half-tall box cursor with
- the overwrite mode.
-
- BOX type #1
- Uses a box cursor with the insert mode and a half-tall box cursor with
- the overwrite mode.
-
- BOX type #2
- Uses a half-tall box cursor with the insert mode and a box cursor with
- the overwrite mode.
-
- Mouse pointer
- Specifies the shape of the mouse pointer.
-
- Display search string
- Specifies a search string to be either reverse-displayed or selected when
- the string is found.
-
-
- == Page 3/3 ==
-
- Accelerate
- Accelerates the cursor movement. Specify the delay time before the cursor
- starts to accelerate.
-
- Blinking interval
- Specifies the interval size of the blinking. Select "Blinking" in "Cursor
- Display" in the second page to make the cursor blink.
-
- Insert position when pasting a line
- Selects the position to start the paste from either above the cursor
- position or below the cursor position when you paste a line.
-
- Cursor position after paste
- Specifies a cursor position either to move to the bottom of the pasted text
- or to not do so after the paste.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.3. Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- In this tab, you can configure the parameters for the colors. The colors
- have to be set with the RGB values. Since it may be difficult to get the
- most favorable RGB values, you can configure the colors by selecting them from
- the mixed color palette in the OS/2 system and dropping them into the boxes
- that display a color for each item. Configure the parameters in all of the
- three pages.
-
- Text
- Configures a color to display the text.
-
- Background
- Configures a color to display the background.
-
- Line number
- Configures a color to display the line numbers. This option is used when
- the line numbers are to be displayed in the "Window" page. The wrap lines
- are also displayed in this color.
-
- Cursor
- Configures a color to display the cursor. The underline for the cursor (to
- be set in the "Cursor" page) is also displayed in this color.
-
- Cursor line
- Configures a color to display the cursor line. The text of the line that
- contains the cursor position (to be set in the "Cursor" page) is displayed
- in this color.
-
- EOL/EOF
- Configures a color to display EOF. The carriage return character (to be
- set in the "Window" page) is also displayed in this color.
-
-
- == Page 2/3 ==
-
- Ruler
- Displays the ruler in the same color as the one that is used to display the
- text and the background.
-
- Ruler - gauge
- Configures a color to display the ruler column gauge.
-
- Ruler - back:
- Configures a color to display the background of the ruler.
-
- Status line
- Configures a color to display the background of the status line that is
- positioned in the bottom of the screen.
-
- Messages
- Configures a color to display the messages that appeared on the left edge
- of the status line that is positioned in the bottom of the screen.
-
- Cursor position
- Configures a color to display the cursor position and the character code of
- the cursor position in the status line that is positioned in the bottom of
- the screen.
-
-
- == Page 3/3 ==
-
- Control character
- Configures a color to display the control character(s) in the status line
- that is positioned in the bottom of the screen.
-
- Progress bar
- Configures a color to display the progress bar in the status line that is
- positioned in the bottom of the screen.
-
- Change off
- Configures a color to state that there are no changes. It is displayed in
- the status line in the bottom of the screen.
-
- Change on
- Configures a color to state that there are some changes. It is displayed
- in the status line in the bottom of the screen.
-
- Recording off
- Configures a color to state that the key operations are not being recorded.
- It is displayed in the status line in the bottom of the screen.
-
- Recording on
- Configures a color to state that the key operations are being recorded. It
- is displayed in the status line in the bottom of the screen.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.4. Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- In this tab, you can configure the parameters for the displayed fonts.
-
- Display area
- Selects an area to be configured.
-
- Font
- Configures a font to be displayed.
-
- Type
- Specifies a font type.
-
- Style
- Specifies a font style.
-
- Size
- Specifies a font size.
-
- Sample
- Displays a text in the specified font type, style and size.
-
- Use outline font
- Uses outline fonts as pictorial fonts.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.5. File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- In this tab, you can configure the parameters for loading / saving files.
- Configure the parameters in all of the three pages.
-
- Ignore EOF when loading
- Ignores EOF characters when loading a file.
-
- Automatically identify EUC & JIS
- Loads a file automatically identifying it when it is written in the EUC and
- JIS codes.
-
- Use / for a path symbol
- Uses / characters instead of path symbols (\).
-
- Use the last path in dialog
- Uses the path of the last file instead of the one of the current file for a
- file dialog box.
-
- Autosave
- Turns on the autosave option. Specify the interval size when this option
- is turned on. Turn on "Autosave to temporary file" when you want to save
- the changes in the temporary file without overwriting the original file.
- The temporary file is opened and saved with a filename starting with FweBak
- in the directory specified by the TMP environment variables of
- Config.Sys.(or in the FWE setup directory when there are no environment
- variables.) The temporary file can be saved in the original file, or it is
- deleted when you exit FWE.
-
- Macro file's path
- Specifies the default path that is used when the FWE macros are executed or
- registered.
-
- Dialog box
- Specifies a dialog box that is used when a file is opened or saved.
-
- FWE standard
- Uses a FWE standard dialog box.
-
- OS/2 standard
- Uses an OS/2 standard dialog box. In this dialog box, you cannot
- select "Disable edit" nor specify the EUC or JIS codes.
-
- User-designed
- Uses a dialog box DLL designed by the user. Refer to "Use of
- user-designed file dialog box" to design a DLL that can be used in FWE.
-
- Sharing
- Configures the sharing mode.
-
- None
- Does not process sharing.
-
- Deny overwrite
- Controls the sharing mode so that the editing file cannot be
- overwritten by another program.
-
- Deny read / write
- Controls the sharing mode so that the editing file cannot be reached
- from another program.
-
-
- == Page 2/3 ==
-
- Process when saving
- Configures the process when a file is saved.
-
- Make backup file
- Makes a backup file with the .Bak extensions.
-
- Do not use the same extensions
- Gives the different extensions (.Ba1, .Ba2, - .B99) to each file when
- there are some .Bak files with the same filename. When there are more
- files with the same filename after .B99, the backup file with the .B99
- extensions will be overwritten.
-
- Backup directory
- Specifies a directory in which a backup file is created. In case the
- specified directory does not exist, it is created when a backup file is
- created. If you specify a path that cannot be recognized as a
- directory, you will see an error and a backup file is not created.
- When nothing is put in this field, a backup file is created in the same
- directory as the one of the editing file. You can use the following
- simple macros in this field:
-
- %Y Creates a directory with the last two digits of the systematic
- year when a file is saved.
-
- %M Creates a directory with the two digits of the systematic month
- when a file is saved.
-
- %D Creates a directory with the two digits of the systematic day
- when a file is saved.
-
- %% % Creates a directory with the % character. When the specified
- directory is the same as any of the macros shown above, the %
- character needs to be specified correctly by this macro.
-
- Example 1) When %Y%M%D is specified, a YYMMDD directory is created for
- a backup file under the directory of the editing file.
-
- Example 2) When C:\TEMP\%Y%M%D is specified, a YYMMDD directory is
- created for a backup file under the C:\TEMP directory.
-
- Delete line-tail space
- Deletes the blank characters in the end of the lines to reduce the file
- size.
-
- Delete size zero file
- Deletes the files of zero(0) byte size when saving.
-
- Not include EOF code
- Does not save the EOF character at the end of a file when saving the
- file.
-
- Line-tail code
- Configures a line-tail code that is used when saving a file.
-
- Default
- Saves a new file with CR/LF, and saves a loaded file with the
- line-tail code that is most used in the original file.
-
- CR/LF
- Saves a file with CR/LF (in the text form of OS/2) for the
- line-tail code.
-
- CR
- Saves a file with the CR character for the line-tail code.
-
- LF
- Saves a file with the LF character for the line-tail code.
-
- Convert
- Converts tabs to spaces (or spaces to tabs) when saving a file.
-
-
- == Page 3/3 ==
-
- Filter when selecting open-file
- Enables FWE to identify files by the extensions put in an open-file dialog
- box.
-
- Default
- Specifies a filter that is used when an open-file dialog box is
- displayed.
-
- Type of file
- Specifies a filter's name.
-
- Filter
- Specifies wildcards to be identified. Multiple wildcards can be
- specified with a blank character to separate them.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6. Toolbar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- In this tab, you can configure the parameters for a toolbar. Configure the
- parameters in all of the two pages.
-
- Visible
- Displays a toolbar.
-
- Balloon help
- Displays the function assigned to each button on a toolbar when a mouse
- pointer is on the button.
-
- Big button
- Displays big buttons on toolbar.
-
- Help text
- Displays a help text with an icon on a button. When this option is on, the
- big buttons are displayed.
-
- Flat button
- Displays bottons without the outlines. When a mouse pointer is on a
- button, the outline is displayed on the button.
-
-
- == Page 2/2 ==
-
- Items
- Configures the items for the buttons of a toolbar.
-
- Items displayed
- Shows a list of the items that are displayed in a toolbar.
-
- Items not displayed
- Shows a list of the items that are not displayed in a toolbar.
-
- Add button
- Adds an item selected in the list of [Items not displayed] to the end
- of the list of [Items displayed].
-
- Above button
- Adds an item selected in the list of [Items not displayed] above the
- item selected in the list of [Items displayed].
-
- Below button
- Adds an item selected in the list of [Items not displayed] below the
- item selected in the list of [Items displayed].
-
- Delete button
- Deletes a selected item from the list of [Items displayed].
-
- Icon file
- Specifies icon files to be displayed. The icons used as the default are in
- FweIcons.DLL. When you specify icon files other than the default, the
- filenames should be input with the extensions. The icon files should be
- copied in the FWE setup directory to be used. If you change this option,
- the set button has to be pushed to execute the changes.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.7. Pop-up menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- In this tab, you can configure the parameters for a pop-up menu.
-
- Show pop-up menu only while pressing right button
- Specifies a way to select the items in a pop-up menu. When this option is
- not selected, a pop-up menu is displayed by clicking the right button of
- the mouse and the items can be selected. When this option is selected, the
- items in a pop-up menu can be selected only while the right button is being
- pressed.
-
- Menu items
- Configures the menu items displayed in a pop-up menu.
-
- Items displayed
- Shows a list of the items that are displayed in a pop-up menu.
-
- Items not displayed
- Shows a list of the items that are not displayed in a pop-up menu.
-
- Add button
- Adds an item selected in the list of [Items not displayed] to the end
- of the list of [Items displayed].
-
- Above button
- Adds an item selected in the list of [Items not displayed] above the
- item selected in the list of [Items displayed].
-
- Below button
- Adds an item selected in the list of [Items not displayed] below the
- item selected in the list of [Items displayed].
-
- Delete button
- Deletes a selected item from the list of [Items displayed].
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.8. Other ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- In this tab, you can configure other options. Configure the parameters in
- all of the two pages.
-
- Word wrap
- Sets the word wrap command when the text wraps to the next line at the
- column number specified in the "Window" page.
-
- Push-in CR
- Pushes a carriage return character to the end of the line without being
- wrapped to the next line. Select this option when only the carriage return
- character is beyond the wrap line and you don't want to have a line with
- only the CR character.
-
- Clear select area after copy
- Clear select area when copy process.
-
- Default process of cursor line
- Turns off the default command that the cursor line is to be selected when
- there is no text selected. This option can be selected for the following
- commands:
-
- Copy (Copy)
- Cut (Cut)
- Copy for append (AddCopy)
- Cut for append (AddCut)
- Copy with quotation mark (UseMarkCopy)
- Insert quotation mark (InsertuseMark)
-
- Process word after cursor position
- Changes the default command that the word containing the cursor position is
- to be selected when there is no text selected, to the command that only the
- part of the word after the cursor position is to be selected. This option
- can be selected for the following commands:
-
- To lower case (LowerCase)
- To upper case (UpperCase)
- Toggle case (ChangeCaseWord)
- Copy to МЯНїХ╢ОЪЧёГXГ^ГbГNБiCopyToFindStackБj
- Expand word copyБiExpandWordCopyБj
-
- Quotation mark
- Configures character strings for the quotation marks that are used for the
- commands such as [Copy with quotation mark].
-
- Post it string
- Configures character strings to be identified as "Post it".
-
-
- == Page 2/2 ==
-
- User defined help
- Specifies help files such as those for development environment of other
- programs to be displayed in FWE.
-
- Name
- Specifies the name of a help.
-
- Help file(s)
- Specifies help files to be displayed. Multiple help files can be
- specified by surrounding each filename with " (double quotation marks)
- and connecting the files with + (plus marks).
-
- Topic
- Uses the word that contains the cursor position as a topic. Only words
- starting with a number or an alphabetic character can be used as
- topics.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. Key assignment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can configure the key assignments by selecting "Key Assignment" from the
- Option menu. With the key assignments, you can configure FWE to work like the
- editor you are familiar with. Refer to the features list for the standard FWE
- functions to be assigned. Refer to Configuration for the key assignments that
- have already been set.
-
- FWE has the standard key assignments of "FWE original", "WordStar-like", and
- "Windows-like". The contents of the standard key assignments are output to the
- text files, which are installed in FWE as Fwe.Txt, WdsrLike.Txt and
- WinLike.Txt. Refer to these text files to learn the initial key assignments.
- These files can also be used when you want to change some key assignments.
-
- The key assignments can be configured by changing the following parameters in a
- dialog box:
-
- Confirm a key assignment
- Select a function to be confirmed from the list of "Functions" shown in
- the left side of the window. When selected, the key to which the
- function is assigned is displayed in the list of "Keys" in the right
- side of the window. If one function is assigned to the multiple keys,
- only one key is displayed in the list. You can confirm all the other
- keys by pushing "Output" button to output the contents of the key
- assignment to a text file.
-
- Release a key assignment
- Select a function to be released from the list of "Functions" shown in
- the left side of the window, and select "None" from the list of "Keys"
- shown in the right side of the window. Then press the "Assign" button.
-
- Change (Configure) a key assignment
- Select a function to be changed from the list of "Functions" shown in
- the left side of the window, and select a key to be assigned from the
- list of "Keys" shown in the right side of the window. Then press the
- "Assign" button. "Shift", "Alt", or "Ctrl" can also be used with a key
- when you configure the key assignment.
-
- Confirm a two-stroke key assignment
- Select a function of the second stroke (2 stroke #1 - #10) to be
- confirmed from the list of "Functions" shown in the left side of the
- window. Pressing the "Assign two stroke" button displays the window in
- which you can confirm the key assignment of the second stroke.
-
- Change (Configure) a two-stroke key assignment
- There are two steps to configure two-stroke key assignments. At first,
- select a function to be assigned to the first stroke from "2 stroke #1
- - #10" in the list of "Functions-other" in the same way you do for
- ordinary key assignments. Then press the "Assign two stroke" button to
- display the window in which you can assign a function to the second
- stroke.
-
- Change (Configure) a user-defined menu
- With a user-defined menu, you can press a key to display a menu in
- which you can select a function. You can process the simple two-stroke
- key assignments by using menus. At first, select a menu to be assigned
- to a key from "Menu #1 - #8" in the list of "Functions-other" in the
- same way you do for ordinary key assignments. Then press the "Define
- menu" button to display the window in which you can specify menu items.
-
- "Define menu" window
- Select an item you want to use from the list of Items not used in
- the right side of the window and press the "Add" button. When you
- want to add an item to a specific position, select an item from the
- list of "Items used" in the left side of the window and press
- either the "Insert above" button or the "Insert below" button.
- When an item is added, the default shows a name of the item in the
- "Item name" box in the bottom of the window. If you want to change
- the name of the item to be shown in the menu, change the name and
- press the "Set" button in the right side of the window. When you
- want to delete an item, select the item and press the "Delete"
- button.
-
- Assign to a special key
- Normally the special keys such as Shift key + a cursor key cannot be
- used in FWE since they are used in OS/2 standard for commands such as
- the cut and paste command. Selecting "Extend assignment" enables you
- to assign functions to those special keys.
-
- The functions to be configured are sorted in the following groups:
-
- Cursor
- Functions to control the cursor movement
-
- Delete
- Functions to delete a text
-
- Insert
- Functions to insert a text
-
- Edit
- Functions to edit a text
-
- Macro
- Functions to execute macros
-
- Window
- Functions to work on windows
-
- Other
- Other functions
-
- The contents of key assignments can be output to a text file and can be input
- from the text file. You can configure a lot of key assignments at a time with
- this option by outputting the contents of the current key assignments to a
- text file and editting the file. Refer to Text format for key assignment to
- edit a text file.
-
- Each button controls the following:БD
-
- Apply
- Applies the changes you have made only to the window from which the key
- assignment dialog box was opened.
-
- Save
- Displays a dialog box to ask you if you want to save the changes you
- have made and applies the changes to all the active windows that were
- opened with the same key assignment file.
-
- Cancel
- Cancels the key assignments you have configured.
-
- Help
- Displays the help file.
-
- Import
- Loads the contents of key assignments from a text file to configure the
- key assignments.
-
- Export
- Outputs the contents of the current key assignments to a text file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1. Cursor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This page contains a list of the functions to control the cursor movement. The
- following are the functions and their movements: (Use the words that are
- enclosed in parentheses when editing a text file.)
-
- No assignment
- Assigns no function to the specified key. Select this item for the key to
- which you don't want to assign any functions.
-
- Cursor up (Up)
- Moves the cursor one line up.
-
- Cursor down (Down)
- Moves the cursor one line down.
-
- Cursor left (Left)
- Moves the cursor one column left.
-
- Cursor right (Right)
- Moves the cursor one column right.
-
- Tab (Tab)
- Moves the cursor to the right by the tab size that is specified in the
- Window page of Environment. Select [Input tab character] in the Insert
- page to input a tab character.
-
- Back tab (BackTab)
- Moves the cursor to the left by the tab size that is specified in the
- Window page of Environment.
-
- Move to top of logical line (LocLineTop)
- Moves the cursor to the first column of a logical line.
-
- Move to end of logical line (LocLineEnd)
- Moves the cursor to the last column of a logical line.
-
- Move to top of physical line (PhyLineTop)
- Moves the cursor to the first column of a physical line.
-
- Move to end of physical line (PhyLineEnd)
- Moves the cursor to the last column of a physical line.
-
- Move to top of file (Top)
- Moves the cursor to the top of a file.
-
- Move to bottom of file (Bottom)
- Moves the cursor to the bottom of a file.
-
- Move to top of screen (TopInScreen)
- Moves the cursor to the top line that is shown in the current screen.
-
- Move to bottom of screen (BottomInScreen)
- Moves the cursor to the bottom line that is shown in the current screen.
-
- Move half-page up (HarfPageUp)
- Moves the cursor up to the previous page by one-half of the window.
-
- Move half-page down (HarfPageDown)
- Moves the cursor down to the next page by one-half of the window.
-
- Move half-page left (HarfPageLeft)
- Moves the cursor to the left by one-half of the window.
-
- Move half-page right (HarfPageRight)
- Moves the cursor to the right by one-half of the window.
-
- Move one page up (PageUp)
- Moves the cursor up to the previous page by the full window size.
-
- Move one page down (PageDown)
- Moves the cursor down to the next page by the full window size.
-
- Move one page left (PageLeft)
- Moves the cursor to the left by the full window size.
-
- Move one page right (PageRight)
- Moves the cursor to the right by the full window size.
-
- Scroll a line up (LineUp)
- Scrolls a line up.
-
- Scroll a line down (LineDown)
- Scrolls a line down.
-
- Scroll a column left (ColumnLeft)
- Scrolls a column to the left.
-
- Scroll a column right (ColumnRight)
- Scrolls a column to the right.
-
- Previous word (PrevWord)
- Moves the cursor to the previous word. Refer to Identify word to see how
- to move the cursor.
-
- Next word (NextWord)
- Moves the cursor to the next word. Refer to Identify word to see how to
- move the cursor.
-
- Move to last position of edit (LastPos)
- Moves the cursor to the last position of the editing.
-
- Mark cursor position (MarkPos)
- Marks the current cursor position.
-
- Mark cursor position in #1 - #5 (MarkPos1 - MarkPos5)
- Marks the current cursor position in the specified mark number.
-
- Jump to mark position (JumpMarkPos)
- Jumps to the marked cursor position.
-
- Jump to mark position #1 - #5 (JumpMarkPos1 - JumpMarkPos5)
- Jumps to the cursor position that is marked in a specified number.
-
- Find (Find)
- Displays a find dialog box. Specify a search string to start the search.
-
- Find previous (FindPrev)
- Searches in the text before the cursor position. When no search string is
- specified, a find dialog box is displayed.
-
- Find next (FindNext)
- Searches in the text after the cursor position. When no search string is
- specified, a find dialog box is displayed.
-
- Replace (Replace)
- Displays a replace dialog box. Specify a replace string to start the
- replacement.
-
- Jump to specified page (JumpPage)
- Moves the cursor to the page that is specified by putting the page number
- in the dialog box.
-
- Jump to specified line (Jump)
- Moves the cursor to the line that is specified by putting the line number
- in the dialog box. When "Edit by page" is selected in the Window page of
- Environment, the cursor jumps to the specified line of the page that
- contains the cursor position. The line numbers are counted according to
- the setting for the line number in the Window page of Environment.
-
- Post it list (PostitList)
- Lists all the lines starting with Post it string that is specified in the
- Other page of Environment. (Also refer to Post it in the functions list.)
-
- Jump to previous post it (PostitPrev)
- Moves the cursor to the Post it string that is positioned before the cursor
- position. The "Post it string" is specified in the Other page of
- Environment. (Also refer to Post it in the functions list.)
-
- Jump to next post it (PostitNext)
- Moves the cursor to the Post it string that is positioned after the cursor
- position. The "Post it string" is specified in the Other page of
- Environment. (Also refer to Post it in the functions list.)
-
- Jump to parentheses (JumpPare)
- Moves the cursor to the parentheses (a character string) that are
- corresponding to the parentheses (a character string) of the cursor
- position. The parentheses (a character string) need to be specified in the
- Expansion page of Keywords.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2. Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This page contains a list of the functions to delete a text. The following
- are the functions and their movements: (Use the words that are enclosed in
- parentheses when editing a text file.)
-
- Delete (Delete)
- Deletes a character at the cursor position.
-
- Backspace (BackSpace)
- Deletes a character to the left of the cursor position.
-
- Delete line (DeleteLine)
- Deletes a logical line at the cursor position.
-
- Join lines (JoinLine)
- Joins the physical line at the cursor position with the next physical line.
- This function works the same way as deleting the CR character at the end of
- the cursor line.
-
- Delete before cursor (DeleteBefore)
- Deletes all the characters before the cursor position in the cursor line.
-
- Delete after cursor (DeleteAfter)
- Deletes all the characters after the cursor position in the cursor line.
-
- Delete word (DeleteWord)
- Deletes the word at the cursor position. Refer to Identify word to see how
- to identify the word to be deleted.
-
- Delete word before cursor (DeleteWordBefore)
- Deletes the word at the cursor position only from the top of the word to
- the character before the cursor position. Refer to Identify word to see
- how to identify the word to be deleted.
-
- Delete word after cursor (DeleteWordAfter)
- Deletes the word at the cursor position only from the cursor position to
- the end of the word. Refer to Identify word to see how to identify the
- word to be deleted.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3. Insert ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This page contains a list of the functions to insert a text. The following
- are the functions and their movements: (Use the words that are enclosed in
- parentheses when editing a text file.)
-
- Input CR character at cursor position (InputReturn)
- Inputs a carriage return character at the cursor position and moves the
- cursor to the next line. The characters after the cursor position are
- pushed to the next line (to the cursor line after the execution.)
-
- Return (Return)
- Inserts a new line under the cursor position and moves the cursor to the
- line.
-
- Return above cursor line (InsertNewLine)
- You can insert a new line above the cursor line with an indent according to
- the indent of the cursor line, and move the cursor to the inserted line.
-
- Return above cursor line (InsertLineUp)
- Inserts a new line above the cursor line with an indent according to the
- indent of the cursor line, and moves the cursor to the inserted line.
-
- Insert line above cursor line (InsertLineBelow)
- Inserts a new line under the cursor line. The cursor stays in the same
- position.
-
- Duplicate line (DupLine)
- Inserts a logical line with the same contents as those of the cursor line
- under the cursor line. When a text is selected, a new line with the same
- contents as those of the selected text is inserted under the selected text.
-
- Split line at cursor position (SplitLine)
- Inserts a CR character at the cursor position and splits the line. The
- characters after the cursor position are pushed to the next line. This
- works as Input CR character at cursor position, but this doesn't indent the
- line.
-
- Toggle typing mode insert/overwrite (Insert)
- Toggles the typing mode (insert/overwrite).
-
- Input tab character (InputTab)
- Inputs a tab character at the cursor position. Select Tab in the Cursor
- page to move the cursor by the tab size.
-
- Input control code (InputHex)
- Inserts a control code at the cursor position.
-
- Insert quotation mark (InsertUseMark)
- Inserts a quotation mark at the top of the cursor line. When a text is
- selected, this function works on the selected text.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4. Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This page contains a list of the functions to edit a text. The following are
- the functions and their movements: (Use the words that are enclosed in
- parentheses when editing a text file.)
-
- Start select (Select)
- Starts selecting a text.
-
- Start expanded select (SelectExpand)
- Starts an expanded select. With an expanded select, the select mode
- switches over (line select/normal select) according to the cursor movement
- (vertical/horizontal).
-
- Start line select (SelectLine)
- Starts selecting a line. When a line select has already started, this
- function cancels the selection.
-
- Start block select (SelectBlock)
- Starts selecting a block. When a block select has already started, this
- function cancels the selection.
-
- Select word (SelectWord)
- Selects a word at the cursor position.
-
- Select All (SelectAll)
- Selects all the contents of the editing file.
-
- Cancel select (SelectCancel)
- Cancels the select process that has started.
-
- Paste (Paste)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the clipboard at the cursor
- position. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block).
-
- Copy (Copy)
- Copies the selected text to the clipboard. Normal/line/block are copied to
- the clipboard in the same way. When no text is selected, the line that
- contains the cursor position is copied to the clipboard. (This default
- command can be turned off in the Other page of Environment.)
-
- Cut (Cut)
- Cuts the selected text to the clipboard. The text will be deleted from the
- editing file. Normal/line/block are cut to the clipboard in the same way.
- When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is cut
- to the clipboard. (This default command can be turned off in the Other
- page of Environment.)
-
- Copy for append (AddCopy)
- Copies the selected text and appends it to the end of the clipboard. When
- a block is selected, it is copied to the clipboard replacing any existing
- clipboard contents. When no text is selected, the line that contains the
- cursor position is copied to the clipboard. (This default command can be
- turned off in the Other page of Environment.)
-
- Cut for append (AddCut)
- Cuts the selected text and appends it to the end of the clipboard. The
- text will be deleted from the editing file. When a block is selected, it
- is cut to the clipboard replacing any existing clipboard contents. When no
- text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is cut to the
- clipboard. (This default command can be turned off in the Other page of
- Environment.)
-
- Paste with quotation mark (UseMarkPaste)
- Pastes the contents of the text that is stored in the clipboard at the
- cursor position of the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each
- line. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block). You can customize the quotation mark in the Other
- page of Environment.
-
- Copy with quotation mark (UseMarkCopy)
- Copies the selected text to the clipboard, embedding a quotation mark on
- top of each line. Normal/line/block are copied to the clipboard in the
- same way. You can customize the quotation mark in the Other page of
- Environment. When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor
- position is copied to the clipboard. (This default command can be turned
- off in the Other page of Environment.)
-
- Paste from stack (PasteFromStack)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position of
- the file. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block).
-
- Delete from stack after paste (PasteFromStackPop)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position of
- the file. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block). The contents are deleted from the stack after being
- pasted.
-
- Copy to stack (CopyToStack)
- Copies the selected text to the stack. Normal/line/block are copied to the
- stack in the same way. When no text is selected, the line that contains
- the cursor position is copied to the stack. (This default command can be
- turned off in the Other page of Environment.)
-
- Cut to stack (CutToStack)
- Cuts the selected text to the stack. The text will be deleted from the
- editing file. Normal/line/block are cut to the stack in the same way.
- When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is cut
- to the stack. (This default command can be turned off in the Other page of
- Environment.)
-
- Paste from stack with quotation mark (UseMarkPasteFromStack)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position of
- the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each line. The contents are
- pasted according to the selected text (normal/line/block).
-
- Delete from stack after paste with quotation mark (UseMarkPasteFromStackPop)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position of
- the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each line. The contents are
- pasted according to the selected text (normal/line/block). The contents
- are deleted from the stack after being pasted.
-
- Copy to stack with quotation mark (UseMarkCopyToStack)
- Copies the selected text to the stack, embedding a quotation mark on top of
- each line. Normal/line/block are copied to the stack in the same way.
- When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is
- copied to the stack. (This default command can be turned off in the Other
- page of Environment.)
-
- Delete top of stack (PopFromStack)
- Deletes the first item of the stack (the item that is used when pasting).
-
- Delete all item in stack (ClearStack)
- Deletes all the items in the stack.
-
- Paste from delete stack (PasteFromDelStackPop)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the delete string stack at the
- cursor position.
-
- Expand word copy (ExpandWordCopy)
- At first, the word after the cursor position is copied to the search string
- stack. Then the next words are copied and added to the search string stack
- successively.
-
- Expand word paste (ExpandWordPaste)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the search string stack at the
- cursor position of the file.
-
- Expand word paste [select] (ExpandWordPasteSelect)
- Displays the list of the contents that are stored in the search string
- stack. The word that is selected in the list will be pasted at the cursor
- position of the file.
-
- Copy to search string stack (CopyToFindStack)
- Copies the selected text to the search string stack.
-
- Convert to lower case (ToLower)
- Converts uppercase characters in the selected text of the file to lowercase
- characters. When no text is selected, the word that contains the cursor
- position is converted. (The default can be changed to a command so that
- only the part of the word after the cursor position is converted. - in the
- Other page of Environment.)
-
- Convert to upper case (ToUpper)
- Converts lowercase characters in the selected text of the file to uppercase
- characters. When no text is selected, the word that contains the cursor
- position is converted. (The default can be changed to a command so that
- only the part of the word after the cursor position is converted. - in the
- Other page of Environment.)
-
- Convert cursor character uppercase<=>lowercase (ChangeCase)
- Converts the character at the cursor position to the uppercase/lowercase
- character and moves the cursor to the right by one character. When a text
- is selected, alphabetical characters in the selected text are converted to
- the uppercase/lowercase, and the cursor doesn't move.
-
- Convert word uppercase<=>lowercase (ChangeCaseWord)
- Converts the first alphabetical character in the selected text to the
- uppercase/lowercase character and accords all the letters of the word at
- the cursor position to the case character you converted the first character
- to. (The default can be changed to a command so that only the part of the
- word after the cursor position is converted. - in the Other page of
- Environment.)
-
- Fill selected text with specified character (Fill)
- Fills the selected text with copies of the specified character.
-
- Undo (Undo)
- Undoes the previous editing change.
-
- Undo line (UndoLine)
- Undoes all the editing changes that have been made to the line that
- contains the cursor position. If the cursor moves out of the editing line,
- this undo command cannot be used.
-
- Undo all (UndoAll)
- Undoes all the changes you have made and goes back to the original file.
- You cannot redo this edit.
-
- Redo (Redo)
- Redoes the change that has been undone previously.
-
- Edit new file (New)
- Creates a new file to edit.
-
- Open file (Open)
- Open a file to edit.
-
- Import file at cursor position (Import)
- Imports a file at the cursor position and adds it to the current editing
- file.
-
- Reload editing file (Reload)
- Reloads the editing file.
-
- Close and open (CloseOpen)
- Closes the editing file and opens a new file in the same window.
-
- Add to ring (AddRing)
- Adds a file to the ring.
-
- Save (Save)
- Saves the editing file under the same field.
-
- Save as (SaveAs)
- Saves the editing file and gives it a new filename.
-
- Force to save (ForceSave)
- Forces FWE to save the editing file.
-
- Save all (AllSave)
- Saves all the editing files under the same fields.
-
- Print (Print)
- Prints the editing text.
-
- Save and quit (File)
- Saves the editing file and quits the program. This function cannot be
- recorded in Record key macro.
-
- Quit (Quit)
- Quits the program. If there are any changes in the files, FWE will ask you
- if you want to save the changes. This function cannot be recorded in Record
- key macro.
-
- Save all and quit (AllFile)
- Saves all the editing files and quits the program. This function cannot be
- recorded in Record key macro.
-
- Quit all (AllQuit)
- Quits all the active windows. If there are any changes in the files, FWE
- will ask you if you want to save the changes before quitting. This function
- cannot be recorded in Record key macro.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.5. Macro ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This page contains a list of the functions to control the macros. The
- following are the functions and their movements: (Use the words that are
- enclosed in parentheses when editing a text file.) The functions on this page
- cannot be recorded by [Record key macro].
-
- Execute previous command (MacroBeforeCmd)
- Executes the previous command again. Only the commands that can be
- recorded by the following [Record key macro] can be executed.
-
- Record key macro (MacroRec)
- Starts/stops recording the contents of the key operations. The recorded
- contents can be used as macros by [Play key macro].
-
- Play key macro (MacroPlay)
- Plays the contents that are recorded by [Record key macro].
-
- Save key macro (MacroSave)
- Saves the contents that are recorded by [Record key macro] in a file.
-
- Load key macro (MacroLoad)
- Loads the contents that are saved in a file by [Save key macro].
-
- Execute macro (MacroExec)
- Executes FWE macros that are written in the REXX language.
-
- Terminate macro (MacroKill)
- Terminates the FWE macros that are in execution. If the macros are on the
- semaphore standby or the I/O standby, they may not be terminated and an
- alarm goes off.
-
- Register macro (MacroRegist)
- Registers the FWE macros that are written in the REXX language.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.6. Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This page contains a list of the functions to work on windows. The following
- are the functions and their movements: (Use the words that are enclosed in
- parentheses when editing a text file.)
-
- Previous FWE (WinPrev)
- Changes the window to the previously used FWE window. This function cannot
- be recorded by Record key macro.
-
- Next FWE (WinNext)
- Changes the window to the next (in the Z order) FWE window. This function
- cannot be recorded by Record key macro.
-
- Window List (WinList)
- Displays the list of the currently active FWE windows. Selecting a window
- from the list enables you to change the current window to the selected
- window.
-
- Change ring (WinNextInRing)
- Changes the window to the window of the next file in the ring.
-
- Scroll with other window (ScrollWithOther)
- Scrolls a window with other editing windows at the same time.
-
- Compare with other FWE (CompareFile)
- Compares the contents of the current file with those of the files that are
- loaded in other active windows.
-
- Continue compare (CompContinue)
- Continues to compare the contents starting with the line after the cursor
- position when [Compare with other FWE] is executed with the Jump to other
- position option.
-
- Cascade (WinCascade)
- Cascades the windows based on the value which is set in the Window page of
- Environment.
-
- Icon all (WinIcon)
- Minimizes all the active windows to icons.
-
- Save desktop (SaveDesktop)
- Saves all the information of the windows on the desktop. The saved
- information can be restored by [Restore desktop].
-
- Restore desktop (RestoreDesktop)
- Restores the information of the windows that are saved by [Save desktop].
- This function cannot be recorded by Record key macro.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.7. Other ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This page contains a list of other functions. The following are the
- functions and their movements: (Use the words that are enclosed in parentheses
- when editing a text file.)
-
- Tag jump (TagJump)
- Executes tag jump.
-
- grep (Grep)
- Executes grep to search for strings in multiple files. The result will be
- displayed in another FWE window.
-
- Show function list (FuncList)
- Lists all the functions in the editing file. Some settings need to be
- configured before you use this function. Refer to the function search
- section to configure the settings.
-
- Jump to previous function (FuncPrev)
- Moves the cursor to the function that is shown before the cursor position.
- (above the cursor position on the screen.) This can be used when you edit
- a file with an extension which is related to a keyword written in a
- language such as C/C++, Java, Pascal, Basic, or Rexx in the Search
- information page of Keywords.
-
- Jump to next function (FuncNext)
- Moves the cursor to the function that is shown after the cursor position.
- (below the cursor position on the screen.) This can be used when you edit
- a file with an extension which is related to a keyword written in a
- language such as C/C++, Java, Pascal, Basic, or Rexx in the Search
- information page of Keywords.
-
- Set character code (SetCode)
- Specifies a character code for the current editing file when it is saved.
- In most cases, the character code for the opened file is used when it is
- saved. SHIFT JIS is used for new files. If EUS or JIS Auto Select cannot
- read a text, you can still specify another character code to open the text.
-
- Resident mode (Tsr)
- Turns on/off the resident mode.
-
- Edit mode (SwitchEditMode)
- Turns on/off the edit mode.
-
- 2 stroke #1 - #10 (2Strok1 - 2Strok10)
- Specifies the first stroke of a two-stroke key. You can specify up to ten
- sets of two-stroke keys with this function.
-
- Menu #1 - #8 (Menu1 - Menu8)
- Displays a user-defined pop-up menu. You can specify up to eight
- user-defined menus with this function.
-
- Program #1 - #10 (ExecPgm1 - ExecPgm10)
- Executes a user-defined external program. The external programs can be
- specified in Set execute program. You can specify up to ten use-defined
- external programs with this function.
-
- Environment (SetEnv)
- Configures the operational environment.
-
- Key assignment (SetKey)
- Configures the key assignments.
-
- Set current keyword (SetKeyword)
- Specifies the keywords that are identified when editing in the current.
-
- List of user defined keywords (ListUserKwd)
- Show list of user defined keywords
-
- Set execute program (SetExecPgm)
- Specifies an external program you want to execute.
-
- Configuration (SetConfig)
- Configures the environment and the key assignment for each extension.
-
- Help index (HelpIndex)
- Displays the Help index.
-
- General help (HelpUse)
- Displays the help file.
-
- Macro help (HelpMacro)
- Displays the macro help file.
-
- Help on help (HelpHelp)
- Displays information on how to use Help.
-
- Product information (HelpAbout)
- Displays the FWE product information.
-
- User help #1 - #5 (UserHelp1 - UserHelp5)
- Displays a user-defined help. The user-defined help can be specified in
- the Other page of Environment. You can specify up to five user-defined
- helps with this function.
-
- Separator line (Separator)
- Displays a separator line. This item can be used only in the user-defined
- menus.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.8. Text format ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This section explains the format of text files that can be read in a key
- assignment dialog box. Since it is a hard job to write a text file from
- scratch, you can output the contents of the existing key assignments into a
- text file in a key assignment dialog box and edit the file. You can also use a
- file that is included in FWE, such as Fwe.Txt, WdSrLike.TxtБCWinLike.Txt for
- example, from which you can start editing.
-
- Example) Sample text
-
- Expand=FALSE
-
- [Define]
- Left=Left
- Right=Right
- Up=Up
- Down=Down
- :
- :
- :
- [Define2-10]
-
- The first line (Expand=FALSE) in the sample text shows the state of the check
- box of the expand assignment in the key assignment dialog box. (TRUE shows
- that the expand assignment is ON.) The next line ([Define]) and the last line
- ([Define2-10]) are called tags, and they are the keywords to start the key
- assignment. For example, a tag [Define] starts the key assignment for the
- ordinary keys (or the first strokes). A tag [Define2-10] starts the key
- assignment for the tenth key of the second stroke. You can use the following
- tags:
-
- [Define] A tag to start the normal key assignment
- [Define2-1] A tag to start the 2-stroke-key assignment #1
- [Define2-2] A tag to start the 2-stroke-key assignment #2
- [Define2-3] A tag to start the 2-stroke-key assignment #3
- [Define2-4] A tag to start the 2-stroke-key assignment #4
- [Define2-5] A tag to start the 2-stroke-key assignment #5
- [Define2-6] A tag to start the 2-stroke-key assignment #6
- [Define2-7] A tag to start the 2-stroke-key assignment #7
- [Define2-8] A tag to start the 2-stroke-key assignment #8
- [Define2-9] A tag to start the 2-stroke-key assignment #9
- [Define2-10] A tag to start the 2-stroke-key assignment #10
- [Menu1] A tag to start the user-defined menu assignment #1
- [Menu2] A tag to start the user-defined menu assignment #2
- [Menu3] A tag to start the user-defined menu assignment #3
- [Menu4] A tag to start the user-defined menu assignment #4
- [Menu5] A tag to start the user-defined menu assignment #5
- [Menu6] A tag to start the user-defined menu assignment #6
- [Menu7] A tag to start the user-defined menu assignment #7
- [Menu8] A tag to start the user-defined menu assignment #8
-
- *As you can see above, you can define up to 10 of the first strokes of the
- 2 stroke keys, and up to 8 of the user-defined menus.
-
- In the item (Left=Left) in the tag [Define], the left "Left" shows a key of
- FWE, the right "Left" shows a function, and = (an equal sign) assigns the
- function to the key. (Only a = sign can be used.) The whole line starting
- with ;; (two semicolons) shows a comment.
-
- Macro files and arguments can be used as functions only in text files for key
- assignments. You can use a macro file by enclosing the filename in
- double-quotation marks ("). When you use a macro argument, it should be
- separated with a comma (,) and should be enclosed in double-quotation
- marks("). If a macro argument includes a double-quotation mark, you have to
- add another double-quotation mark (shown as ""). Two semicolons (;;) cannot
- be used since they are used to show a comment.
-
- Example: Ctrl+A="Macro-File.Mac", "Macro-Args"
-
- The specified macros have to exist in Macro file path in the File page of
- Environment. When there is no macro file path specified, you can search for a
- macro file in the setup directory.
-
- The following functions can be used in FWE:
-
- Cursor
- A list of functions to control the cursor movement.
-
- Delete
- A list of functions to delete a text.
-
- Insert
- A list of functions to insert a text.
-
- Edit
- A list of functions to edit a text.
-
- Macro
- A list of functions to execute macros.
-
- Window
- A list of functions to work on windows.
-
- Other
- A list of other functions.
-
- The following are simple samples of key assignments that are specified using
- those functions. (Only one line is mentioned in the samples. In a real text,
- you need to write all the keys you want to use.)
-
- Sample 1 : Ctrl key + Home key makes a cursor jump to the top of the file.
-
- [Define]
- Ctrl+Home=Top ;;Jumps to the top of the file
-
- Sample 2 : Ctrl key + 1 key turns on the 2 stroke mode, and Ctrl key + 2 key
- makes the cursor jump to the top of the file.
-
- [Define]
- Ctrl+1=2Strok1 ;;The first stroke of a 2 stroke key
-
- [Define2-1]
- Ctrl+2=Top ;;Jumps to the top of the file
-
- Sample 3 : Ctrl key + M key displays the user-defined menu #1, and Ctrl key +
- Z key displays the user-defined menu #2.
-
- [Define]
- Ctrl+M=Menu1 ;;Displays the user-defined menu
- Ctrl+Z=Menu2 ;;Displays the user-defined menu
-
- [Menu1]
- "~Open..."=Open
- "~Close"=Quit
-
- [Menu2]
- "Jump to ~top of line"=LocLineTop
- "Jump to ~bottom of line"=LocLineEnd
-
- When you define a menu, write Item=Function as shown above and the item
- must be enclosed in double-quotation marks ("). (~) and others Up-Bar
- items in the sample specify short-cut keys in the menus.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Keywords ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can specify the keywords that can be identified in editing texts. The
- character string constants and comments that are peculiar to some languages can
- also be identified with the keywords. Display keywords has to be turned on
- with a color specified in the Window page of Environment.
-
- The keywords of the C/C++ language, the Java language, the Pascal language,
- the Basic language, and the REXX language are already registered in FWE. Some
- keywords can be added to/deleted from the preregistered keywords for your
- convenience. Also you can use Other 1 and Other 2 to specify keywords for
- other languages, and Default to specify only keywords.
-
- You can configure the following:БD
-
- Search information
- Keyword 1
- Keyword 2
- String(s)
- Numeric
- Comment
- Expansion
-
- Each button controls the following:БD
-
- Save
- Applies the settings you have made only to the window from which the
- "Keywords" dialog box was opened, and saves the settings in the hard
- disk. You need to restart the program to apply the settings to the
- windows that are already opened.
-
- Cancel
- Cancels the keyword settings you have configured.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.1. Search information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can configure the information to search keywords. This setting is very
- important when keywords are identified. Check the parameters that are
- configured in this section when you identify the keywords.
-
- File extension to be related to this setting
- You can specify file extensions that are related to the contents of the
- "Search information" setting. When you open a file with an extension that
- is specified in this command, the contents of the corresponding keyword
- setting are automatically loaded. The multiple extensions can be specified
- with a blank character to separate them. This cannot be executed in the
- default keyword setting.
-
- Word delimiter
- You can specify delimiters that are used to extract words from a text. The
- specified delimiters are used when you search for keywords word by word, or
- when you search for/replace character strings. A blank character, a TAB
- character, and a CR character cannot be specified in this command, since
- they are specified as standard. (Do not specify them twice.)
-
-
- = Page 2/3 =
-
- Ignore case of keyword
- When this box is checked, FWE searches for the specified keywords with no
- upper/lower case sensitivity. This command is used for the Pascal
- language, the Basic language, and the Rexx language.
-
- Search keyword by word
- When this box is checked, FWE searches for the specified keywords word by
- word. Use the character that is specified as a delimiter in [Word
- delimiter] to extract a word from a text when you search by word.
- Ordinarily, you should search for the keywords word by word in programming
- languages.
-
- Color for keyword 1
- You can specify a color to display the keyword 1. The color has to be set
- with the RGB values. Since it may be difficult to get the most favorable
- RGB values, you can configure the color by selecting it from the mixed
- color palette in the OS/2 system and dropping it into the box that displays
- the color for this item.
-
- Color for keyword 2
- You can specify a color to display the keyword 2. The color has to be set
- with the RGB values. Since it may be difficult to get the most favorable
- RGB values, you can configure the color by selecting it from the mixed
- color palette in the OS/2 system and dropping it into the box that displays
- the color for this item.
-
-
- = Page 3/3 =
-
- Default search path for related file extension
- You can search the paths that are specified in this command to open a
- file, instead of specifying the file path. The settings that are
- configured in this command are saved in a text file. If you find it is a
- bit of trouble to use the setting dialog, you can directly edit the
- definition file referring to the keyword text format. Define environment
- variables to search for a specific directory without considering the
- extensions.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.2. Keyword 1, Keyword 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can specify the keywords that can be identified. Each keyword can be
- specified as a string of up to 32 characters, and 14 pages can be used to
- specify keywords. If the keywords are searched for with upper/lower case
- sensitivity, the keyword strings also need to be specified here with
- upper/lower case sensitivity.
-
- Keywords should not be specified with one character. You can get a faster
- operating speed when the items that are specified in the keywords, character
- string constants, and comments are longer. The number of the items does not
- matter in terms of result, but the length of each item matters. You should
- avoid specifying the keywords, character string constants, and comments with
- one character, since the item with one character specified slows the
- operational speed.
-
- Important information
- Since it is very difficult to specify a lot of keywords by using a keyword
- setting dialog box, you can directly edit the definition file referring to
- the keyword text format.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3. String ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can configure the following options when the character string constants in
- a programming language are identified and displayed. The symbols of character
- string constants cannot be searched for as words. This setting item is not
- displayed in the default keyword setting.
-
-
- You can configure the following:
-
- Visible
- When this is checked, the character string constants are identified and
- displayed. This option slows the operational speed.
-
- String(s)
- You can specify symbols to show character string constants. ' and " are
- used in the C/C++ language, ' is used in the Pascal language, and " is
- used in the Basic language. The multiple symbols can be specified with a
- blank character to separate them.
-
- Ignore the same string(s)
- When this is checked, the symbol that is written with the same symbol in a
- row becomes a part of the character string in a language such as the Pascal
- language, the Basic language, and the Rexx language.
-
- Ignore the string(s) after escape
- When this is checked, the symbol that is written after an escape symbol(\)
- becomes a part of the character string in a language such as the C/C++
- language. The escape character has to be specified when this item is
- checked.
-
- Color
- You can specify the color to display the characters (strings). The color
- has to be set with the RGB values. Since it may be difficult to get the
- most favorable RGB values, you can configure the color by selecting it from
- the mixed color palette in the OS/2 system and dropping it into the box
- that displays the color for this item.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.4. Numeric ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can specify items to identify numeric constants in programming languages.
- The constants are always searched for as words. However, since an arithmetic
- syntax cannot be analyzed, a minus sign (-) of a negative number cannot be
- identified. A decimal point which has no preceding integer cannot be
- identified. This setting item is not displayed in the default keyword setting.
-
-
- You can configure the following:
-
- Visible
- When this is checked, the numeric constants are identified and displayed.
- This option slows the operational speed.
-
- Preceding/following character
- You can display a dialog box to specify a preceding/following character
- which represents a constant. This item has to be specified when you want
- to display constants.
-
- Color
- You can specify the color to display the numerics. The color has to be set
- with the RGB values. Since it may be difficult to get the most favorable
- RGB values, you can configure the color by selecting it from the mixed
- color palette in the OS/2 system and dropping it into the box that displays
- the color for this item.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.4.1. Constant information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can specify search information to identify numeric constants in
- programming languages by combining the patterns which are specified for the
- preceding character and the following character.
-
- You can configure the following:
-
- Preceding character string
- Specify items in pages 1 - 2.
-
- Following character string
- Specify items in pages 3 - 4.
-
- You can specify the following items:
-
- String
- You can specify a preceding/following character string. This item
- doesn't have to be specified when there is no preceding/following
- character.
-
- No case
- You can select this item when you ignore the case
- (uppercase/lower-case) of the preceding/following character.
-
- 2
- You can use the binary notation.
-
- 8
- You can use the octal notation.
-
- 10
- You can use the decimal notation.
-
- 16(L)
- You can use the hexadecimal notation (lowercase characters).
-
- 16(U)
- You can use the hexadecimal notation (uppercase characters).
-
- Decimal
- You can select this item when decimal points are effective.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.5. Comment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can configure the following options when comments in a programming language
- are identified and displayed. You cannot search for the comments as words
- except for the word search in a one-line comment. This setting item is not
- displayed in the default keyword setting.
-
-
- You can configure the following:
-
- Visible
- When this is checked, the comments are identified and displayed. This
- option slows the operational speed.
-
- Start
- You can specify symbols to start comments. /* is used in the C/C++
- language, and none is used in the Basic language. The multiple symbols can
- be specified with a blank character to separate them.
-
- End
- You can specify symbols to end comments. */ is used in the C/C++ language,
- and none is used in the Basic language. The multiple symbols can be
- specified with a blank character to separate them.
-
- One-line comment
- You can specify a symbol (a character string) to start a comment that ends
- at the CR character.
-
- For normal search
- You can specify a comment symbol that is not searched for as a word.
- // is used for the C/C++ language. Check the item on the right side
- when searching with no upper/lower case sensitivity.
-
- For word search
- You can specify a comment symbol that is searched for as a word. rem
- is used in the Basic language. Check the item on the right side when
- searching with no upper/lower case sensitivity.
-
- Color
- You can specify the color to display the comments. The color has to be set
- with the RGB values. Since it may be difficult to get the most favorable
- RGB values, you can configure the color by selecting it from the mixed
- color palette in the OS/2 system and dropping it into the box that displays
- the color for this item.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.6. Expansion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can configure the information in the parentheses (character strings) that
- are identified in the function that moves the cursor to the corresponding
- parentheses (character strings).
-
- Ignore case
- When this is checked, the parentheses (character strings) are specified
- with no upper/lower case sensitivity.
-
- Parentheses
- You can specify the start parentheses (character strings) and the end
- parentheses (character strings). You can also specify FWE searches for the
- specified parentheses (character strings) as words. You can specify up to
- 20 sets of parentheses (character strings) in three pages. In the keyword
- settings of the C/C++ language and the Java language, the parentheses {, }
- are defined for the default. You don't have to define them though it is
- not a problem to define them again.
-
- For either the start symbols or the end symbols, the parentheses (character
- strings) can be overwrapped when defined. For example, when the start
- symbols are "do" and "select", and the end symbols are both "end", you can
- specify as follows: (Specify the item that includes both the start symbol
- and the end symbol first.)
-
- Start symbol End symbol
- do end
- select (do not input anything)
-
- Important information
- Do not specify the same symbols (character strings) for the start
- symbol and the end symbol. The end symbol can include the string of the
- start symbol. (e.g. the start symbol is SECTION and the end symbol is
- END SECTION) If the start symbol includes the string of the end
- symbol, the program cannot operate normally.
-
-
- You can configure the following items in the fourth page. The items can be
- displayed only in the C/C++ language and the Java language.
-
- Indent for the language
- When this item is turned on, you can indent lines in the special way of the
- language. When a line is fed after the symbol {, the specified number of
- columns is indented. When the symbol } is input, the cursor moves back to
- the column that includes the corresponding { symbol. [Auto indent] has to
- be turned on in the Cursor page of Environment to use this item.
-
- Indent information
- You can spefify the column size for an indentation and the column number to
- start the indentation mode. When [Expanded indent]is selected, the
- following functions are added to the ordinary indent functions.
-
- 1. When you get "case :" or "Default:" as the result of an input, this
- function searches for the previous "switch" sentences, moves the
- sentences back to the specified column number, and indents the next
- line.
-
- 2. When you get "public:", "protected:", or "private:" as the result of
- an input, this function searches for the previous "class" definition,
- moves the sentences back to the specified column number, and indents
- the next line.
-
- Special setting
- You can specify that FWE indents lines in the "switch", "class", and
- "struct" sentences.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.7. Text format ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Since it is a difficult job to specify a lot of keywords in the setting dialog,
- you can directly edit the text file in which the FWE keywords are saved. This
- file is in the FWE setup directory. The following text files are included:
-
- The C/C++ language keyword file
- FweC.Kwd
-
- The Java language keyword file
- FweJava.Kwd
-
- The Pascal language keyword file
- FwePas.Kwd
-
- The Basic language keyword file
- FweBas.Kwd
-
- The REXX language keyword file
- FweRexx.Kwd
-
- Other 1language keyword file
- FweOtr1.Kwd
-
- Other 2language keyword file
- FweOtr2.Kwd
-
- The default keyword file
- Fwe.Kwd
-
- Each text file that is shown above consists of the tags of [BREAK],[BREAK2],
- [PATH], [WORD1], and [WORD2].
-
- The [BREAK] tag starts to specify a word delimiter.
- The [BREAK2] tag starts to specify a word delimiter for display.
- The [PATH] tag starts to specify a default search path for a related
- extension file.
- The [WORD1] tag starts keyword 1, The [WORD2] tag starts keyword 2. (Refer to
- the following example.)
-
- When you finish editing a file, save the file before you specify the rest of
- the information of the keyword setting.
-
- Example of keyword setting file:
-
- [BREAK]
- -+/*=%
-
- [BREAK2]
-
- [PATH]
- C:\TEMP
- C:\TEMP\DOWN
-
- [WORD1]
- keyword1 - 1
- keyword1 - 2
- *
- *
- last keyword1
-
- [WORD2]
- keyword2 - 1
- keyword2 - 2
- *
- *
- last keyword2
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can create preferable environments using the environment files and the
- key-assignment files in "Configuration" in the option menus. You can relate
- the environments to file extensions so that FWE can switch the environments
- automatically when a file is loaded.
-
- You can switch the environments automatically according to the file extensions
- with the following method:
-
- 1. Create an environment for the file extensions. Select "Save with
- another/new configuration" in the dialog box when you save the
- environment, and specify an appropriate filename and comment.
-
- 2. Create a key assignment for the file extensions. Select "Save with
- another/new configuration" in the dialog box when you save the key
- assignment, and specify an appropriate filename and comment. This
- setting is needed only when you want to change the key assignment for
- each extension.
-
- 3. Select "Configuration" in the option menus and relate the environment and
- key assignment to the file extensions.
-
-
-
- The configuration dialog box contains the following:БD
-
- Related file extensions
- You can select the file extensions to be related to. When you open the
- file with the extensions that are specified in this box, the
- corresponding configuraion information is automatically loaded with the
- file.
-
- Add file extensions
- You can press the "Add" button to add new extensions.
-
- Delete file extensions
- You can delete file extensions that have been registered. Select
- file extensions and press the "delete" button to delete them.
-
- Environment
- You can select an environment file you want to use.
-
- Key assignment
- You can select a key assignment file you want to use.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:
-
- Apply
- Applies the settings you have made only to the window from which the
- "Configuration" dialog box was opened.
-
- Save
- Saves the settings you have made on the hard disk. You need to restart
- the FWE program to apply the settings to all the windows.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Features List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Select the features you want to refer to in the following list of items:
-
- Cursor movement
- File
- Clipboard
- Stack
- Search
- Cursor jump
- Convert
- Delete
- Insert
- Macro
- Window
- Other
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.1. Cursor movement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Tab
- Moves the cursor to the right by the tab size that is specified in the
- Window page of Environment. Select [Input tab character] in the Insert
- page to input a tab character.
-
- Back tab
- Moves the cursor to the left by the tab size that is specified in the
- Window page of Environment.
-
- Move to top of logical line
- Moves the cursor to the first column of a logical line. This function is
- assigned to Home key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Move to end of logical line
- Moves the cursor to the last column of a logical line. This function is
- assigned to End key in the FWE standard key assignment. 1.
-
- Move to top of physical line
- Moves the cursor to the first column of a physical line. You can use them
- with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Move to end of physical line
- Moves the cursor to the last column of a physical line. You can use them
- with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Move to top of file
- Moves the cursor to the top of a file. This function is assigned to Ctrl +
- Home key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Move to bottom of file
- Moves the cursor to the bottom of a file. This function is assigned to
- Ctrl + End key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Move to top of screen
- Move to top of screen. This function is assigned to Alt + Home key in the
- FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Move to bottom of screen
- Moves the cursor to the bottom line that is shown in the current screen.
- This function is assigned to Alt + End key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Move half-page up
- Moves the cursor up to the previous page by one-half of the window. You
- can use them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Move half-page down
- Moves the cursor down to the next page by one-half of the window. You can
- use them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Move half-page left
- Moves the cursor to the left by one-half of the window. You can use them
- with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Move half-page right
- Moves the cursor to the right by one-half of the window. You can use them
- with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Move one page left
- Moves the cursor to the left by the full window size. This function is
- assigned to Alt + Left key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Move one page right
- Moves the cursor to the right by the full window size. This function is
- assigned to Alt + Right key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Previous word
- Moves the cursor to the previous word. Refer to Identify word to see how
- to move the cursor. This function is assigned to Ctrl + Left key in the
- FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Next word
- Moves the cursor to the next word. Refer to Identify word to see how to
- move the cursor. This function is assigned to Ctrl + Right key in the FWE
- standard key assignment.
-
- Jump to parentheses
- Moves the cursor to the parentheses (a character string) that are
- corresponding to the parentheses (a character string) of the cursor
- position. The parentheses (a character string) need to be specified in the
- Expansion page of Keywords. This function is assigned to Ctrl + [ and Ctrl
- + ] key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.2. File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Edit new file
- Creates a new file to edit. You can use them with keys by registering them
- in Key assignment.
-
- Open file
- Open a file to edit. This function is assigned to Ctrl + O key in the FWE
- standard key assignment.
-
- Import file at cursor position
- Imports a file at the cursor position and adds it to the current editing
- file. This function is assigned to Ctrl + I key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Close and open
- Closes the editing file and opens a new file in the same window. You can
- use them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Add to ring
- Adds a file to the ring. You can use them with keys by registering them in
- Key assignment.
-
- Edit mode
- Turns on/off the edit mode. You can use them with keys by registering them
- in Key assignment.
-
- Set character code
- Specifies a character code for the current editing file when it is saved.
- In most cases, the character code for the opened file is used when it is
- saved. SHIFT JIS is used for new files. If EUS or JIS Auto Select cannot
- read a text, you can still specify another character code to open the text.
- This function is assigned to Ctrl + T key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Save
- Saves the editing file under the same field. This function is assigned to
- PF2 key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Save as
- Saves the editing file and gives it a new filename. You can use them with
- keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Save all
- Saves all the editing files under the same fields. You can use them with
- keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Save and quit
- Saves the editing file and quits the program. This function cannot be
- recorded in Record key macro. This function is assigned to PF4 key in the
- FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Quit
- Quits the program. If there are any changes in the files, FWE will ask you
- if you want to save the changes. This function cannot be recorded in Record
- key macro. This function is assigned to PF3 key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Save all and quit
- Saves all the editing files and quits the program. This function cannot be
- recorded in Record key macro. You can use them with keys by registering
- them in Key assignment.
-
- Quit all
- Quits all the active windows. If there are any changes in the files, FWE
- will ask you if you want to save the changes before quitting. This function
- cannot be recorded in Record key macro. You can use them with keys by
- registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Print
- Prints the editing text. You can use them with keys by registering them in
- Key assignment.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.3. Clipboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE is equipped with some useful clipboard features as well as the standard
- OS/2 clipboard commands. Also FWE has a special clipboard feature which is
- called "stack". Refer to Features List - Stack for the stack features.
-
- Select area:
-
- Normal
- This is the standard selection method in OS/2. An area can be selected
- with Shift + a cursor key in the FWE standard key assignment. You can
- also select an area by dragging the mouse or by clicking the end of the
- selected area while holding the Shift key.
-
- Line
- You can select an area by the line.
-
- Expand
- With an expanded select, the select mode switches over (line
- select/normal select) according to the cursor movement
- (vertical/horizontal). You can use them with keys by registering them
- in Key assignment.
-
- Box
- You can select an area in a box.
-
- Word
- Selects a word at the cursor position. This function is assigned to
- PF5 key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- All
- Selects all the contents of the editing file. This function is
- assigned to Ctrl + / key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Copy:
-
- Normal
- Copies the selected text to the clipboard. Normal/line/block are
- copied to the clipboard in the same way. When no text is selected, the
- line that contains the cursor position is copied to the clipboard.
- (This default command can be turned off in the Other page of
- Environment.) This function is assigned to PF8 key in the FWE standard
- key assignment.
-
- For append
- Copies the selected text and appends it to the end of the clipboard.
- When a block is selected, it is copied to the clipboard replacing any
- existing clipboard contents. When no text is selected, the line that
- contains the cursor position is copied to the clipboard. (This default
- command can be turned off in the Other page of Environment.) This
- function is assigned to Shift + PF8 key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- With quotation mark
- Copies the selected text to the clipboard, embedding a quotation mark
- on top of each line. Normal/line/block are copied to the clipboard in
- the same way. You can customize the quotation mark in the Other page
- of Environment. When no text is selected, the line that contains the
- cursor position is copied to the clipboard. (This default command can
- be turned off in the Other page of Environment.) You can use them with
- keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Cut:
-
- Normal
- Cuts the selected text to the clipboard. The text will be deleted from
- the editing file. Normal/line/block are cut to the clipboard in the
- same way. When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor
- position is cut to the clipboard. (This default command can be turned
- off in the Other page of Environment.) This function is assigned to
- PF7 key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- For append
- Cuts the selected text and appends it to the end of the clipboard. The
- text will be deleted from the editing file. When a block is selected,
- it is cut to the clipboard replacing any existing clipboard contents.
- When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is
- cut to the clipboard. (This default command can be turned off in the
- Other page of Environment.) This function is assigned to Shift + PF7
- key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Paste:
-
- Normal
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the clipboard at the cursor
- position. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block). This function is assigned to PF9 key in the FWE
- standard key assignment.
-
- With quotation mark
- Pastes the contents of the text that is stored in the clipboard at the
- cursor position of the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each
- line. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block). You can customize the quotation mark in the Other
- page of Environment. You can use them with keys by registering them in
- Key assignment.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.4. Stack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE has the stack function as a special clipboard feature. Refer to Features
- List - Clipboard for the standard clipboard features.
-
- Select area:
-
- You can select an area in the same way as the normal selection method of
- the clipboard feature.
-
- Copy:
-
- Normal
- Copies the selected text to the stack. Normal/line/block are copied to
- the stack in the same way. When no text is selected, the line that
- contains the cursor position is copied to the stack. (This default
- command can be turned off in the Other page of Environment.): You can
- use them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Copy to stack with quotation mark
- Copies the selected text to the stack, embedding a quotation mark on
- top of each line. Normal/line/block are copied to the stack in the
- same way. When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor
- position is copied to the stack. (This default command can be turned
- off in the Other page of Environment.) You can use them with keys by
- registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Expand word copy
- At first, the word after the cursor position is copied to the search
- string stack. Then the next words are copied and added to the search
- string stack successively. You can use them with keys by registering
- them in Key assignment.
-
- Cut:
-
- Normal
- Cuts the selected text to the stack. The text will be deleted from the
- editing file. Normal/line/block are cut to the stack in the same way.
- When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is
- cut to the stack. (This default command can be turned off in the Other
- page of Environment.) You can use them with keys by registering them
- in Key assignment.
-
- Paste:
-
- Normal
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position
- of the file. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block). You can use them with keys by registering them in
- Key assignment.
-
- Delete (Pop) from stack after paste
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position
- of the file. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block). The contents are deleted from the stack after
- being pasted. You can use them with keys by registering them in Key
- assignment.
-
- Paste from delete stack
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the delete string stack at the
- cursor position. You can use them with keys by registering them in Key
- assignment.
-
- Paste from stack with quotation mark
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position
- of the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each line. The
- contents are pasted according to the selected text (normal/line/block).
- You can use them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Delete (Pop) from stack after paste with quotation mark
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position
- of the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each line. The
- contents are pasted according to the selected text (normal/line/block).
- The contents are deleted from the stack after being pasted. You can
- use them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Expand word paste
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the search string stack at the
- cursor position of the file. You can use them with keys by registering
- them in Key assignment.
-
- Expand word paste [select]
- Displays the list of the contents that are stored in the search string
- stack. The word that is selected in the list will be pasted at the
- cursor position of the file. You can use them with keys by registering
- them in Key assignment.
-
- Pop:
-
- Delete (Pop) top of stack
- Deletes the first item of the stack (the item that is used when
- pasting). You can use them with keys by registering them in Key
- assignment.
-
- Delete (Pop) all item in stack
- Deletes all the items in the stack. You can use them with keys by
- registering them in Key assignment.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.5. Search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Find
- Displays a find dialog box. Specify a search string to start the search.
- This function is assigned to Ctrl + F key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Find previous
- Searches in the text before the cursor position. When no search string is
- specified, a find dialog box is displayed. This function is assigned to
- Ctrl + P key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Find next
- Searches in the text after the cursor position. When no search string is
- specified, a find dialog box is displayed. This function is assigned to
- Ctrl + N key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Replace
- Displays a replace dialog box. Specify a replace string to start the
- replacement. This function is assigned to Ctrl + R key in the FWE standard
- key assignment.
-
- Post it list
- Lists all the lines starting with Post it string that is specified in the
- Other page of Environment. (Also refer to Post it in the functions list.)
- You can use them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Jump to previous post it
- Moves the cursor to the Post it string that is positioned before the cursor
- position. The "Post it string" is specified in the Other page of
- Environment. (Also refer to Post it in the functions list.) You can use
- them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Jump to next post it
- Moves the cursor to the Post it string that is positioned after the cursor
- position. The "Post it string" is specified in the Other page of
- Environment. (Also refer to Post it in the functions list.) You can use
- them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- grep
- Executes grep to search for strings in multiple files. The result will be
- displayed in another FWE window. This function is assigned to Ctrl + G key
- in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Function list
- You can display a list of functions (or possible functions) that are
- written in the editing file. This feature is assigned to Alt + X key in
- the FWE standard key assignment. You need to specify some items in the
- function search page before using this feature.
-
- Jump to previous function
- You can move the cursor to the function that is shown before the cursor
- position (above the cursor position on the screen). This feature is
- assigned to Alt + B key in the FWE standard key assignment. This feature
- can be used when you edit a file with an extension which is related to a
- keyword written in a language such as C/C++, Java, Pascal, Basic, or Rexx
- in the "Search information" page of "Keywords".
-
- Jump to next function
- You can move the cursor to the function that is shown after the cursor
- position (below the cursor position on the screen). This feature is
- assigned to Alt + A key in the FWE standard key assignment. This feature
- can be used when you edit a file with an extension which is related to a
- keyword written in a language such as C/C++, Java, Pascal, Basic, or Rexx
- in the "Search information" page of "Keywords".
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.6. Cursor jump ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Jump to specified page
- Moves the cursor to the page that is specified by putting the page number
- in the dialog box. You can use them with keys by registering them in Key
- assignment.
-
- Jump to specified line
- Moves the cursor to the line that is specified by putting the line number
- in the dialog box. When "Edit by page" is selected in the Window page of
- Environment, the cursor jumps to the specified line of the page that
- contains the cursor position. The line numbers are counted according to
- the setting for the line number in the Window page of Environment. This
- function is assigned to Ctrl + J key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Mark cursor position
- Marks the current cursor position in the specified mark number. This
- function is assigned to Ctrl + M key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Jump to mark position
- Jumps to the marked cursor position. This function is assigned to Ctrl + K
- key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Tag jump
- Executes tag jump. This function is assigned to Shift + PF10 key in the
- FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Move to last position of edit
- Moves the cursor to the last position of the editing. This function is
- assigned to Ctrl + L key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.7. Convert ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Convert to lower case
- Converts uppercase characters in the selected text of the file to lowercase
- characters. When no text is selected, the word that contains the cursor
- position is converted. (The default can be changed to a command so that
- only the part of the word after the cursor position is converted. - in the
- Other page of Environment.) You can use them with keys by registering them
- in Key assignment.
-
- Convert to upper case
- Converts lowercase characters in the selected text of the file to uppercase
- characters. When no text is selected, the word that contains the cursor
- position is converted. (The default can be changed to a command so that
- only the part of the word after the cursor position is converted. - in the
- Other page of Environment.) You can use them with keys by registering them
- in Key assignment.
-
- Convert cursor character uppercase<=>lowercase
- Converts the character at the cursor position to the uppercase/lowercase
- character and moves the cursor to the right by one character. When a text
- is selected, alphabetical characters in the selected text are converted to
- the uppercase/lowercase, and the cursor doesn't move. This function is
- assigned to Ctrl + X key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Convert word uppercase<=>lowercase
- Converts the first alphabetical character in the selected text to the
- uppercase/lowercase character and accords all the letters of the word at
- the cursor position to the case character you converted the first character
- to. (The default can be changed to a command so that only the part of the
- word after the cursor position is converted. - in the Other page of
- Environment.) You can use them with keys by registering them in Key
- assignment.
-
- Fill selected text with specified character
- Fills the selected text with copies of the specified character. You can
- use them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.8. Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Delete
- Deletes a character at the cursor position. This function is assigned to
- Delete key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Delete line
- Deletes a logical line at the cursor position. This function is assigned
- to Ctrl + D key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Join lines
- Joins the physical line at the cursor position with the next physical line.
- This function works the same way as deleting the CR character at the end of
- the cursor line. You can use them with keys by registering them in Key
- assignment.
-
- Delete after cursor
- Deletes all the characters after the cursor position in the cursor line.
- This function is assigned to Ctrl + E key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Delete before cursor
- Deletes all the characters before the cursor position in the cursor line.
- This function is assigned to Ctrl + B key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Delete word after cursor
- Deletes the word at the cursor position only from the cursor position to
- the end of the word. Refer to Identify word to see how to identify the
- word to be deleted. You can use them with keys by registering them in Key
- assignment.
-
- Delete word
- Deletes the word at the cursor position. Refer to Identify word to see how
- to identify the word to be deleted. This function is assigned to Ctrl +
- Delete key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Delete word before cursor
- Deletes the word at the cursor position only from the top of the word to
- the character before the cursor position. Refer to Identify word to see
- how to identify the word to be deleted. You can use them with keys by
- registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Backspace
- Deletes a character to the left of the cursor position. This function is
- assigned to Backspace in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.9. Insert ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Input CR character at cursor position
- Inputs a carriage return character at the cursor position and moves the
- cursor to the next line. The characters after the cursor position are
- pushed to the next line (to the cursor line after the execution.) This
- function is assigned to Enter (Return) key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Return
- Inserts a new line under the cursor position and moves the cursor to the
- line. This function is assigned to Shift + Enter (Return) key in the FWE
- standard key assignment.
-
- Return above cursor line
- Inserts a new line above the cursor line with an indent according to the
- indent of the cursor line, and moves the cursor to the inserted line. This
- function is assigned to Alt + D key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Insert line above cursor line
- Inserts a new line under the cursor line. The cursor stays in the same
- position. This function is assigned to Alt + U key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Duplicate line
- Inserts a logical line with the same contents as those of the cursor line
- under the cursor line. When a text is selected, a new line with the same
- contents as those of the selected text is inserted under the selected text.
- This function is assigned to Ctrl + C key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Split line at cursor position
- Inserts a CR character at the cursor position and splits the line. The
- characters after the cursor position are pushed to the next line. This
- works as Input CR character at cursor position, but this doesn't indent the
- line. You can use them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Toggle typing mode insert/overwrite
- Toggles the typing mode (insert/overwrite). This function is assigned to
- Insert key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Input tab character
- Inputs a tab character at the cursor position. Select Tab in the Cursor
- page to move the cursor by the tab size. This function is assigned to Tab
- key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Input control code
- Inserts a control code at the cursor position. This function is assigned
- to Ctrl + V key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Insert quotation mark
- Inserts a quotation mark at the top of the cursor line. When a text is
- selected, this function works on the selected text. You can use them with
- keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.10. Macro ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Keyboard macro:
-
- Execute previous command
- Executes the previous command again. Only the commands that can be
- recorded by the following [Record key macro] can be executed. This
- function is assigned to Ctrl + \ key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Record
- Starts/stops recording the contents of the key operations. The recorded
- contents can be used as macros by [Play]. This function is assigned to
- Shift + PF1 key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Play
- Plays the contents that are recorded by [Record]. This function is
- assigned to Shift + PF2 key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Save
- Saves the contents that are recorded by [Record] in a file. You can
- use them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Load
- Loads the contents that are saved in a file by [Save]. You can use
- them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- FWE Macro:
-
- Execute
- Executes FWE macros that are written in the REXX language. You can use
- them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Terminate
- Terminates the FWE macros that are in execution. If the macros are on
- the semaphore standby or the I/O standby, they may not be terminated
- and an alarm goes off. You can use them with keys by registering them
- in Key assignment.
-
- Register
- Registers the FWE macros that are written in the REXX language. You
- can use them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.11. Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Previous FWE
- Changes the window to the previously used FWE window. This function cannot
- be recorded by Record key macro. This function is assigned to PF11 key in
- the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Next FWE
- Changes the window to the next (in the Z order) FWE window. This function
- cannot be recorded by Record key macro. This function is assigned to PF12
- key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- Window list
- Displays the list of the currently active FWE windows. Selecting a window
- from the list enables you to change the current window to the selected
- window. This function is assigned to Alt + L key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Change ring
- Changes the window to the window of the next file in the ring. This
- function is assigned to Shift + PF12 key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Scroll with other window
- Scrolls a window with other editing windows at the same time. You can use
- them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Compare with other FWE
- Compares the contents of the current file with those of the files that are
- loaded in other active windows. You can use them with keys by registering
- them in Key assignment.
-
- Continue compare
- Continues to compare the contents starting with the line after the cursor
- position when [Compare with other FWE] is executed with the Jump to other
- position option. You can use them with keys by registering them in Key
- assignment.
-
- Cascade
- Cascades the windows based on the value which is set in the Window page of
- Environment. You can use them with keys by registering them in Key
- assignment.
-
- Icon all
- Minimizes all the active windows to icons. You can use them with keys by
- registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Save desktop
- Saves all the information of the windows on the desktop. The saved
- information can be restored by [Restore desktop]. You can use them with
- keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Restore desktop
- Restores the information of the windows that are saved by [Save desktop].
- This function cannot be recorded by Record key macro. You can use them
- with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.12. Other ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Resident mode (Tsr)
- Turns on/off the resident mode. You can use them with keys by registering
- them in Key assignment.
-
- Execute program
- Executes a user-defined external program. The external programs can be
- specified in Set execute program. You can specify up to ten use-defined
- external programs with this function.
-
- User help
- Displays a user-defined help. The user-defined help can be specified in
- the Other page of Environment. You can specify up to five user-defined
- helps with this function.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. Special functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Select the function you want to refer to in the following list of items:
-
- Environment variables
-
- Logical line and physical line
- Text code
- Ring
- Stack
- Regular expressions
- Escape sequence for search
- Mark cursor position
- Tag jump
- grep
- Post it
- Function search
- Jump to corresponding parenthesis
- Record/play key macro
- Register macro
- Scroll with other
- Compare with other file
- Save/restore desktop
- Resident
- Execute program
- Display help
- Identify word
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.1. Environment variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can use the following environment variables in FWE. You can specify the
- environment variables by editing Config.Sys and restart the program to finish
- the editing.
-
- FWEPATH
- If no path is specified to load a file, you have to specify a directory
- to find the file that you want to load. Like specifying PATH, multiple
- paths can be specified with ; to separate them. You also see [Default
- search path for related file extensions] in the keywords settings,
- though in this setting you can search only for the files with
- extensions that are related to the specified keywords. With FWEPATH,
- however, you can search for all files without considering the
- extensions.
-
- Example) SET FWEPATH=C:\;C:\FWE;
-
- This specified path has a lower priority to [Default search path for
- related file extensions] in the keywords setting. This path is used
- when a file cannot be found with [Default search path for related
- extensions].
-
- FWELOG
- When you load a file in the directory (including its subdirectory)
- which is specified with FWELOG, the file opens with the non-editable
- mode. Multiple paths can be specified with ; to separate them. If you
- want to edit a file which was opened with the non-editable mode,
- [Inhibit edit] need to be turned off in the file menu.
-
- Example) SET FWELOG=C:\TEMP;C:\OS2\SYSTEM;
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.2. Logical line and physical line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- In FWE logical lines and physical lines are used very often. These lines are
- defined as following:
-
- A logical line
- A line on the display ignoring the top of line and the CR character.
-
- A physical line
- A line from the top to the carriage return character.
-
- When the top of a logical line is Column 1, a column number is defined as a
- logical column. When the top of a physical line is Column 1, a column number
- is defined as a physical column.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.3. Text code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can edit the FWE files with the text codes such as Shift JIS, EUC, and
- JIS. As default, only files with JIS code can be edited, though you can also
- edit the files with EUC and JIS codes by using the following methods:
-
- When dropping an icon into FWE
- Select [Automatically identify EUC and JIS when loading] in the file page
- of Environment. In this case, FWE automatically identifies all the code
- forms of the files which are loaded both by default and by dropping the
- icons into FWE. When you don't drop an icon into FWE to load a file, use
- the next method to get a faster processing speed.
-
- When not dropping an icon into FWE
- Selecting [EUC, JIS code] in the open dialog box when you load a file
- enables you to edit the file with a code other than Shift JIS. You need to
- set this option every time you load a file since this setting cannot be
- saved.
-
- When specifying text code
- Althought FWE automatically identifies EUC and JIS codes as much as
- possible, there may be some errors in the results. If you find some
- errors, select [Character code] in the file menu and specify the code, then
- push the [Reload] button to reload the editing file.
-
- You can change the text code that was selected for a loaded file when you
- save the file. Open a dialog box in [Character code] in the file menu to
- select a text code you want to use when saving the file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.4. Ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE ordinarily creates another window when opening a file. However, like a
- DOS editor you can load multiple files in one window with the Ring function.
- Note that only one file can be edited at one time and that you have to switch
- the files in the ring to edit. Select [Add to ring] in the file menu and load
- a file to add the file to the ring. Select [Switch ring] in the file menu to
- switch a file to another in the ring.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.5. Stack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE has a special clipboard function ("stack") that works like a clipboard.
-
- Each stack has different functions:
-
- Cut and Paste Stack
- This has the same functions as the ones of the ordinary clipboard.
-
- This stack has a size of 64K bytes. When the contents exceed the
- size, the oldest information is deleted from the stack. When you are
- registering information of over 64K bytes, only the information is
- saved in the stack.
-
- Deleted String Stack
- This stack automatically saves the character strings that have been
- deleted by "Delete"(Delete, BackSpace), "Delete before cursor"
- (DeleteBefore), "Delete after cursor"(DeleteAfter), "Delete word"
- (DeleteWord), "Delete word before cursor"(DeleteWordBefore), or "Delete
- word after cursor"(DeleteWordAfter).
-
- This stack has a size of 1K bytes. When the contents exceed the size,
- the oldest string is deleted from the stack. When you delete a
- character string of over 1K bytes, only the string is saved in the
- stack.
-
- Use the function "Paste from deleted string
- stack"(PasteFromDelStackPop) to paste character strings from this
- stack. The character strings are deleted from the stack after they are
- pasted.
-
- Search String Stack
- This stack automatically saves the character strings that are used for
- searches. Also, it saves the character strings that are copied by the
- function of "Expand word copy"(ExpandWordCopy).
-
- This stack can save up to 20 strings. When the contents exceed the
- limit, the oldest string is deleted from the stack.
-
- Use the functions, "Expand word paste"(ExpandWordPaste) and "Expand
- word paste (select)"(ExpandWordPasteSelect) to paste character strings
- from this stack.
-
- You need to assign the functions to keys in Key assignment to use the
- functions shown above.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.6. Regular expressions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE enables you to use regular expressions for searches with JRE which was
- created by Mr. Yamada. You can search for much more complicated targets by
- using regular expressions. Since regular expressions are very useful when you
- work on a text (especially when you search), the metacharacters (the special
- characters) should be used for searches.
-
- Metacharacter Meaning
-
- [] Character class
- () Grouped pattern
- ^ Top of line
- $ Bottom of line
- : Arbitrary character excluding carriage return characters
- * The previous pattern repeats more than once or does not
- repeat
- + The previous pattern repeats more than once
- ? The previous pattern appears more than once or does not
- appear
- | Disjunction of pattern
- \ Escape character
-
- You can also use escape sequences with escape characters (\). When you
- search for a metacharacter itself, it needs to be escaped from with an escape
- character. Escape characters also need to be escaped from since they are
- special characters. Refer to the manual of JRE or other reference books for
- details.
-
-
- Example
-
- Character class
- If a character matches one of the characters that are enclosed in [],
- you can get a result. For instance, when you search for fac[et], both
- face and fact can match.
-
- Grouped pattern
- This function is used with the following Disjunction of pattern.
-
- Disjunction of pattern
- You can search for character strings of multiple patterns. For
- instance, when you search for publish|sale, both publish and sale can
- match.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.7. Escape sequence for search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE enables you to use the following escape sequences when searching:
-
- Specify character codes in octal
- Use "\ooo". Specify character codes in "ooo" with one to three octal
- digits.
-
- Specify character codes in hexadecimal
- Use "\xhh". Specify character codes in "hh" with one or two hexadecimal
- digits.
-
- Bell code (0x07)
- Use "\a".
-
- Backspace (0x08)
- Use "\b".
-
- CR code (0x0d / 0x0a)
- Use "\r" or "\n". The two control the same operation in FWE.
-
- Horizontal tabulation code (0x09)
- Use "\t".
-
- Vertical tabulation code (0x11)
- Use "\v".
-
- Form feed (0x12)
- Use "\f".
-
- Escape code (0x27)
- Use "\e".
-
- Top of word
- Use "\<". This escape sequence can be used only when regular expressions
- are used for searches.
-
- End of word
- Use "\>". This escape sequence can be used only when regular expressions
- are used for searches.
-
- English word
- Use "\w". This escape sequence can be used only when regular expressions
- are used for searches.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.8. Mark cursor position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE enables you to mark (store) up to five cursor positions and to move the
- cursor with the stored information.
-
- Select [Mark cursor position] in the Search menu to mark the current cursor
- position. This function is assigned to Ctrl + M key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- Select [Jump to marked position] in the Search menu to use the marked cursor
- positions. This function is assigned to Ctrl + K key in the FWE standard key
- assignment.
-
- The line/culomn positions are stored when you mark a cursor position. The
- line contents are registered in the mark dialog box when the cursor position is
- marked, though the line contents won't be changed when the text is edited, so
- that you can refer to the line contents that are shown in the dialog box.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.9. Tag jump ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE enables you to use tag jump with tag files. Select [Tag jump] in the
- Search menu to use tag jump. This function is assigned to Shift + PF10 key in
- the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- About tag jump...
- For instance, when FWE has a compile error of the C language, you will get
- a result such as;
-
- fwe.c(100:9) : ERROR EDC0045: extensions flag are not declared.
-
- You can redirect this result to a file. This result contains the
- filename, the line number, and the column number. When you set the cursor
- at the position and execute tag jump, the window switches to the FWE.C
- window with the cursor at the position of line:100/column:9. If the FWE.C
- is not opened, it is automatically opened.
-
- Tag file form
- Use the following tag file form to create a tag file:
-
- Filename(line number:column number)
-
- The column number is optional.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.10. grep ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE is equipped with the "grep" function which allows you to search for
- character strings in multiple files. Regular expressions and search escape
- sequences can be used for searches with the grep function of FWE. You can also
- specify multiple wildcards for the files you want to search for. Select
- [Execute grep] in the Search menu to start grep. This function is assigned to
- Ctrl + G key in the FWE standard key assignment.
-
- About grep...
- The "grep" function searches multiple files for the specified character
- strings and creates a tag file with the search result. Since the tag file
- is displayed in a new FWE window, you cannot execute grep when the maximum
- number of FWE windows have been activated. While grep is in execution, you
- cannot execute any keystrokes but one to switch the windows in the FWE
- where grep was executed.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.11. Post it ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- When a Post it string that is specified in the Other page of Environment
- starts at the first column of a text, the string is recognized as a bookmark to
- function as a label. You can use the "Post it" function on chapters and parts
- so that you can display them in a list and jump to the previous or next
- chapter/part.
-
- Select [Post it list] or [Previous/next Post it] in the Search menu to work on
- this function in FWE.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.12. Function search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE can display a list of functions in the editing file and move the cursor to
- the function that is positioned above/below the cursor position. Only the
- C/C++, Java, Pascal, Basic, Rexx languages can be identified.
-
- This function is to exclude the comments and character string constants that
- are peculiar to the languages and to search for the functions of the source
- code. However, with the limited processing time, FWE may find the functions in
- the comments. (This is a specification.) Especially, when you try to move the
- cursor from a comment line to a function that is above/below the cursor
- position, FWE may not identify the comment line. When you want to move the
- cursor to a function that is above/below the cursor position, you should start
- the process at a line that is not a comment.
-
- In Pascal language, when you see a function (prototype) declaration of forward
- reference followed by a variable definition (Var) or a constant definition
- (Const) that is in the source code, FWE may find the function definition as the
- beginning of a function. This problem is a FWE specification that is caused by
- keeping the processing speed and finding "a function inside function" that is
- defined in the variable domain (Var) in a function.
-
- Specify the following to use this function:
-
- 1. Specify file extensions to be related to a keyword in the Search
- information page of Keywords. Use "c" or "cpp" in C/C++ language.
-
- 2. Specify a character string constant in the Character (string) page of
- Keywords.
-
- 3. Specify a comment in the Comment page of Keywords.
-
- Select [Function list](Alt+X in the FWE standard key assignment) or
- [Previous/next function](Alt+B/A in the FWE standard key assignment) in the
- Search menu to control the functions in FWE.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.13. Jump to corresponding parenthesis ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE enables you to move the cursor from a parenthesis to the corresponding
- parenthesis. You can register up to 20 character strings of up to 12 characters
- each for a parenthesis in the Expansion page of Keywords.
-
- When ( is specified to start a parenthesis and ) to end a parenthesis, the
- cursor moves between the corresponding ( and ) with this function.
-
- Assign the function to a key to move the cursor to the corresponding
- parenthesis in FWE. (The function is assigned to Ctrl + [/] in the FWE standard
- key assignment.)
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.14. Record/play key macro ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE can record a series of key operations to repeat it with a single
- operation. Select [Start/end record key macro] in the macro menu (this is
- assigned to Shift + PF1 key in the FWE standard key assignment) and record a
- series of key operations in FWE to use this function. When a series of key
- operations is recorded, select [Start/end record key macro] in the macro menu
- again to finish the recording.
-
- Select [Play key macro] in the macro menu (this is assigned to Shift + PF2 key
- in the FWE standard key assignment) to use the recorded key operations. Since
- the recorded information will be deleted when you finish FWE, you may need to
- select [Save key macro] in the macro menu to save the information on the hard
- disk. You can select [Load key macro] in the macro menu to use the saved key
- operations.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.15. Register macro ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Select [Register] in the macro menu to register the FWE macros and use them.
- You can register up to 30 macros. You can use the registered macros in
- toolbars and pop-up menus by registering them in Environment, or you can use
- them with keys by registering them in Key assignment.
-
- Also the registered macros are automatically inserted in the macro menu.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.16. Scroll with other ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE enables you to scroll a file with another FWE editing file at the same
- time. This function can be used only when you scroll a window by moving the
- cursor up/down in Cursor movement of Key assignment. You cannot execute this
- function if any macros are in execution or any files are being
- loaded/saved/replaced in the target window.
-
- Assign the function to a key with the key assignment or select [Scroll with
- other] in the window menu to use this function.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.17. Compare with other file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE enables you to compare a file with another editing file. You can start
- comparing at the first lines, the cursor lines (physical lines), or the cursor
- positions. You can display a list of the comparison results in another FWE
- window and move the cursor to the primary difference. You cannot execute this
- function if any macros are in execution or any files are being
- loaded/saved/replaced in the target window.
-
- When you configure the comparison result to move the corsor to the primary
- difference, you can use the [Continue compare] to resume comparing under the
- same condition. You can continue comparing only in the window that has already
- been compared. You can continue comparing as followed:
-
- When you started comparing at the first line/the cursor line.
- You can resume comparing at the cursor line. Move the cursor to the
- position where you want to resume comparing in both FWE windows to
- continue the comparison.
-
- When you started comparing at the cursor position.
- You can resume comparing at the cursor position. Move the cursor to
- the position where you want to resume comparing in both FWE windows to
- continue the comparison.
-
- Assign the function to a key with the key assignment or select [Compare with
- other file] or [Continue compare] in the window menu to use this function.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.18. Save/restore desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE enables you to save the current window information on the hard disk (save
- desktop) when you suspend the editing and to restore the information (restore
- desktop) when you restart editing the window. You can save/restore the
- information of the window size/position, the editing file, and the cursor
- position.
-
- Assign the function to a key with the key assignment or select [Save desktop]
- or [Restore desktop] in the window menu to use this function.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.19. Resident ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Since FWE as an editor is expected to be used very often, the starting time
- should not cause much stress to the users. However, having all the useful
- functions in FWE will slow the starting time.
-
- In order to shorten the starting time, FWE has a function which leaves a part
- of the program in the memory and stands by for the next activation. You can
- save the starting time since a part of the program stays in the memory with
- this function.
-
- This function is called resident in FWE. Assign the function to a key with
- the key assignment or select [Resident] in the option menu to use this
- function.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.20. Execute program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Select "Execute program" in the option menu to specify up to 10 other programs
- you want to execute in other sessions. Then you can register the specified
- programs on the toolbar menus or the pop-up menus with Environment or on the
- keys with Key assignment.
-
- The programs which are specified in this function are automatically inserted
- in the option menu.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.21. Display help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can specify Helps in the Other page of Environment. Then you can register
- the specified Helps on the toolbar menus or the pop-up menus with Environment
- or on the keys with Key assignment.
-
- The Helps which are specified in this function are automatically inserted in
- the help menu.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.22. Identify word ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- FWE sorts characters by five groups (character types) when identifying words.
-
- 1. Blank characters, tab characters, carriage return characters, delimiter
- characters that are specified in Search information of Keywords.
-
- 2. All half-size characters except the above
-
- You can use the sorted groups as follows:
-
- With [Move to previous word]
- You can move the cursor to the left from a sorted group to the position
- that is shown as [previous character group] < [current character group].
- The cursor always stops at the beginning and the end of lines.
-
- With [Move to next word]
- You can move the cursor to the right from a sorted group to the position
- that is shown as [previous character group] > [current character group].
- The cursor always stops at the beginning and the end of lines.
-
- With [Select word], [Delete word], or [Delete word before/after cursor]
- You can select/delete words until the position where [previous character
- group] is different from [current character group].
-
- With [Search/replace word] or [Search keywords]
- You can search for character strings that are enclosed with characters of
- the group 1.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.23. Using a user-designed file dialog box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can use a user-designed DLL to change a dialog box that is displayed when
- loading a file or saving a file. Since FWE uses a custom file dialog box as a
- file dialog box, you need to replace it by creating DLL which has the interface
- for the OS/2 custom file dialog box (dialog procedures) as follows:
-
- DLL filename
- Specify the DLL filename as USERFDLG.DLL.
-
- Dialog ID
- Spacify the dialog ID as 256.
-
- Dialog procedure name
- The DLL filename needs two kinds of dialog procedures (one to open a file,
- the other to save a file). Since FWE controls links with procedure names,
- you have to name the dialog procedure to open a file fileDlgProc, the one
- to save a file fileDlgProc2, then you have to export them to an external
- program.
-
- Argument
- Arguments in the custom file dialog box are the FILEDLG structure of OS/2.
- The pointer of the structure is returned by WinQueryWindowPtr(hwnd,
- QWL_USER) so that you can look up the arguments in the DLL you are
- creating. The following is the list of the FWE's special information that
- is set in the ulUser member of the FILEDLG structure. (All logical OR)
- Refer to manuals such as one of PM programming for more detail information
- on the custom file dialog box.
-
- FILEOPEN_OPTION_SORTNAMEБi0x00000001Бj
- Sorts the list of files by the filename.
-
- FILEOPEN_OPTION_SORTTIMEБi0x00000002Бj
- Sorts the list of files by the file date.
-
- FILEOPEN_OPTION_LASTINDEXБi0x00000010Бj
- Displays the files by descending sort.
-
- FILEOPEN_OPTION_ENABLECODEБi0x00000040Бj
- Enables you to specify files with the EUC and JIS codes.
-
- FILEOPEN_OPTION_EUCJISБi0x00000080Бj
- Selects the files with the EUC and JIS codes.
-
- FILEOPEN_OPTION_ENABLECHKБi0x00000100Бj
- Enables you to inhibit editing a file.
-
- FIL8EOPEN_OPTION_DISABLEEDITБi0x00000200Бj
- Disables your ability to edit a file.
-
- Return value
- The return value is also set referring to the custom file dialog box. You
- have to use the flags that are shown above to specify the user's options
- (such as the EUC/JIS code and edit inhibit) in the ulUser member of the
- FILEDLG structure.
-
- Installation location
- Copy the DLL you have created to the directory in which FWE has been
- installed.
-
- Using DLL
- Specify User-designed for the dialog box item in the file page of
- Environment.
-
-
- Example
-
- MRESULT EXPENTRY _Export fileDlgProc( HWND hwnd, ULONG msg, MPARAM mp1, MPARAM
- mp2 )
- {
- MRESULT mResult = FALSE;
-
- switch( msg ) {
- case WM_INITDLG:
- break;
-
- case WM_CONTROL:
- break;
-
- default:
- mResult = WinDefFileDlgProc( hwnd, msg, mp1, mp2 );
- break;
- }
- return( mResult );
- }
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. How to use dialogs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Select the help you want to refer to in the following list of items:
-
- File open dialog
- File save dialo
- Print
- Print options
- Fill character
- Expand word paste [select]
- Input control code
- Find
- Replace
- Jump
- Jump to specified page
- Mark cursor position
- Jump to mark position
- grep
- Post it
- Register macro
- Window list
- Scroll with other FWE
- Compare with other FWE
- Execute program
- User-defined help
- Configuration - Add file extensions
- Save environment, key Assignment
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.1. File Open dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Select the arrow to the right of the Drive list to display all the
- drives on your system.
-
- 2. Select a drive from the Drive list.
-
- 3. Select a directory from the Directory list.
-
- 4. Select a file name from the File list or type in a file name and
- select the Open pushbutton to display the file you want to edit.
-
- 5. Select [Disable edit] and/or [EUC,JIS code], if you need.
-
- 6. Press "Ok" button.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Ok
- Open a select file.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.2. File Save dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Select the arrow to the right of the Drive list to display all the
- drives on your system.
-
- 2. Select a drive from the Drive list.
-
- 3. Select a directory from the Directory list.
-
- 4. Type the name of the file you want to save in the Save as filename
- field and select the Ok pushbutton.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Ok
- Save the file.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.3. Set character code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- Select a kind of character code.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Ok
- Set the character code when a file is saved.
-
- Reload
- Reopens the current file with specified character code.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.4. Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Select a printer you want to use.
-
- 2. Select paper you want to use.
-
- 3. Specify margin sizes for the paper. Since the margins include the
- printer information of Print option, you need to display the print
- preview to adjust the sizes.
-
- 4. Specify a font you want to use when printing.
-
- 5. Select an output method. When WYSIWYG is specified, you can display the
- print preview. You may want to print with TEXT, since it takes far more
- time to print with WYSIWYG than to print with TEXT.
-
- 6. Specify the number of copies you want to print.
-
- 7. Press the Option button to specify the print options when you want to
- print any additional information to add to the contents of the editing
- file, or when you need to specify the page break.
-
- 8. Confirm if the selected paper matches the paper of the printer job that
- is displayed when you press the "Property" button. The two paper types
- have to match each other to start printing.
-
- 9. Press the "Print" button to start printing.
-
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Print
- Execute print.
-
- Options
- Specifies the additional information to be printed and the page break.
-
- Properties
- Displays a dialog box of job settings for the system.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.4.1. Print options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- You can specify the information you want to print and the page break. You can
- specify the following options:
-
- Additional information by page
- Specifies additional information to be printed by page. You can
- specify the following contents:
-
- Print filename
- Prints the filename of the editing file on each page.
-
- Print page number
- Prints the page number on each page.
-
- Print system date
- Prints the system date when printing on each page.
-
- Pos:
- Specifies the position for additional information to be printed,
- from the top of the paper.
-
- Print quality
- Adjusts the quality of the printed characters. This option is used
- when you want to print characters a little darker. If you just want to
- raise the printing density, the job property dialog of the printer can
- be used to get a better printing quality.(Some printers can't control
- this setting.)
-
- Standard
- Does not change the printing quality. This is commonly used when
- printing.
-
- A little darker
- Prints characters darker by 1 dot.
-
- Darker
- Prints characters darker by 2 dots.
-
- Much darker
- Prints characters darker by 3 dots.
-
- Other
- Specifies additional information by line and character replacement.
- You can specify the following contents:
-
- Print line number
- Prints the line numbers on each page.
-
- Match line spacing with display
- Matches the line spacing in the printed matter with the one that is
- displayed, so that you can get a wider line spacing which is easier
- to read.
-
- Change control characters to blanks
- Prints a text changing control characters (01h - 1fh) into blank
- characters.
-
- Page break
- Specifies a forced pagebreak. Select an item from the following:
- If no item is selected, FWE breaks a page when the printing reaches the
- end of the paper.
-
- Ctrl + C code
- Breaks a page when Ctrl + C code is found in the text. When you
- print a line that contains only one character of Ctrl + C with
- Print line number selected, you won't get the line number of the
- Ctrl + C line in the printed result.
-
- Ctrl + L code
- Breaks a page when Ctrl + L code is found in the text. When you
- print a line that contains only one character of Ctrl + L with
- Print line number selected, you won't get the line number of the
- Ctrl + L line in the printed result.
-
- Specified character string
- Breaks a page when a specified character is found in the text. A
- character string needs to be specified to use this option. When
- you print a line that contains only the specified character string
- with Print line number selected, you won't get the line number in
- the printed result.
-
- Enable [Edit page by page]
- This item can be used only when Edit page by page is turned on in
- the window page of Environment. When this item is selected, FWE
- breaks a page at the line number that is specified in Edit page by
- page.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Ok
- Save the options.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.5. Fill character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- Input a fill character.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Ok
- Fills the selected text with copies of the specified character.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.6. Expand word paste [select] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog: Select a string that is used for paste.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Select
- Paste a select string at cursor position.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.7. Input control code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Select a control code in list box.
-
- 2. Press "Ok" button.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Ok
- Input a control code.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.8. Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Enter a character string you want to search for. Or move the cursor
- to a word you want to search for and display a search dialog box. As
- default, the word that contains the cursor position (or the first item
- in the search string stack when there is no word at the cursor
- position) is initially displayed as a search string.
- When you want the first item in the search string stack to be
- initially displayed as a search string, select the check box of
- [Initially display the previous search string]. This setting is
- reflected in the replace and grep dialog boxes.
- Escape sequences can be used in searches.
-
- 2. Select the options if needed.
-
- 3. Specify the search area if needed.
-
- 4. Press the "Previous" or "Next" button to start searching.
-
- Each option controls the following:БD
-
- Ignore case
- FWE searches for the specified search string with no upper/lower case
- sensitivity.
-
- Word search
- FWE searches for the specified search string word by word. Use the
- character that is specified as a delimiter in Keyword to extract a word
- from a text when you search word by word.
-
- Regular expressions
- You can use regular expressions in searches. When this function is
- selected, you cannot select [Word search] and [Ignore EOL].
-
- You can select the search area as following:БD
-
- All text
- FWE searches for the specified search string in the whole document.
- Ignoring the cursor position, FWE searches from the top/end of the
- document toward the specified direction.
-
- Selected area
- FWE searches for the specified search string in the selected area.
- Ignoring the cursor position, it searches from the top/end of the
- document toward the specified direction. When you want to change the
- search area or quit the search in the selected area, you have to
- display the search dialog box and specify the search string again.
-
- Default
- FWE starts searching for the specified search string before/after the
- cursor position.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Previous
- FWE searches the text above the cursor position.
-
- Next
- FWE searches the text below the cursor position.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Memory
- A string is memoried to "Search String Stack". FWE does not searches
- the text.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.9. Replace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Enter a search string you want to be replaced. Or move the cursor to
- a word you want to search for and display a replace dialog box. As
- default, the word that contains the cursor position (or the first item
- in the search string stack when there is no word at the cursor
- position) is initially displayed as a search string.
- When you want the first item in the search string stack to be
- initially displayed as a search string, select the check box of
- [Initially display the previous search string]. This setting is
- reflected in the search and grep dialog boxes.
- Escape sequences can be used in search.
-
- 2. Enter a replace string. Escape sequences can be used in replace
- strings. When no replace string is entered, the search string (to be
- replaced) is deleted.
-
- 3. Select the options if needed.
-
- 4. Specify the search area if needed.
-
- 5. Press the "Previous" or "Next" button to start replacing.
-
- Each option controls the following:БD
-
- Ignore case
- FWE searches for the specified search string with no upper/lower case
- sensitivity.
-
- Word search
- FWE searches for the specified search string word by word. Use the
- character that is specified as a delimiter in Keyword to extract a word
- from a text when you search by word.
-
- Regular expressions
- You can use regular expressions in searches. When this function is
- selected, you cannot select [Word search] and [Ignore EOL].
-
- Confirm
- You can confirm before you replace a specified character string.
-
- You can select the search area as following:БD
-
- All text
- FWE searches for the specified search string in the whole document.
- Ignoring the cursor position, FWE searches from the top/end of the
- document toward the specified direction.
-
- Selected area
- FWE searches for the specified search string in the selected area.
- Ignoring the cursor position, it searches from the top/end of the
- document toward the specified direction. When you want to change the
- search area or quit the search in the selected area, you have to
- display the search dialog box and specify the search string again.
-
- Default
- FWE starts searching for the specified search string before/after the
- cursor position.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Previous
- FWE replaces the text above the cursor position.
-
- Next
- FWE replaces the text below the cursor position.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.10. Jump ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- Specified line number for jump.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Jump
- Jump to specified line.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.11. Jump to specified page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- Specified page number for jump.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Jump
- Jump to specified page.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.12. Mark cursor position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Move the cursor to the position you want to mark before displaying a
- mark dialog box.
-
- 2. Select an area where you want to register the marked position.
-
- 3. Press the "Select" button.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Select
- Registers the marked position in the selected area.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.13. Jump to mark position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Select a line for jump in dialog.
-
- 2. Press "Select" button.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Select
- Jump to select line.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.14. grep ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Enter a character string you want to search for. Or move the cursor
- to a word you want to search for and display a search dialog box. As
- default, the word that contains the cursor position (or the first item
- in the search string stack when there is no word at the cursor
- position) is initially displayed as a search string.
- When you want the first item in the search string stack to be
- initially displayed as a search string, select the check box of
- [Initially display the previous search string]. This setting is
- reflected in the search and replace dialog boxes.
- Escape sequences can be used in searches.
-
- 2. Enter filenames you want to search. Wildcards can be used in this
- field. Also multiple filenames can be specified with a comma (,) to
- separate them.
-
- 3. Specify the options.
-
- 4. Specify character codes for the searched files. When files with the
- EUC or JIS code are searched, you can usually use [Auto identify].
- However, since [Auto identify] doesn't identify everything, you had
- better specify the character code when the searched files are with
- either the EUC or JIS code.
-
- 5. Select a drive and directory that contains the searched files if
- needed. When the check box of [Current directory] is selected, the
- current directory is displayed as the drive and directory list.
-
- 6. Press the "Execute" button to start grep. The result is displayed in
- another window when grep is finished.
-
- Each option controls the following:БD
-
- Ignore case
- FWE searches for the specified search strings with no upper/lower case
- sensitivity.
-
- Word search
- FWE searches for the specified search string word by word. Use the
- character that is specified as a delimiter in Keyword to extract a word
- from a text when you search by word.
-
- Regular expressions
- You can use regular expressions in searches. When this function is
- selected, you cannot select [Word search] and [Ignore EOL].
-
- Include sub directory
- You can search for files in the subdirectory under the directory where
- you started searching.
-
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Go
- Execute grep.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.15. Post it ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- Select a line for jump in daialog.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Select
- Jump to select line.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.16. Function list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- Select a line for jump in daialog.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Select
- Jump to select line.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.17. Register macro ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Move the cursor to the input area that corresponds to the number to be
- registered.
-
- 2. Specify a name for a macro you want to register.
-
- 3. Enter a macro name or press the "Refer" button to specify a macro name
- you want to register. You need to specify a macro name by entering a
- complete pathname or by copying a macro file to the macro file path
- that is specified in the File page of Environment to enter only the
- filename.
-
- 4. Specify arguments to activate macros if needed.
-
- 5. Register all the macros you want to specify within the five pages.
-
- 6. Press the "Save" button.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Save
- Saves the contents that have been specified.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.18. Window list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- Select a window in dialog.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Select
- Switch to select window.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.19. Scroll with other FWE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- Select a window you want to scroll with the editing window in the list and
- press the "Select" button. This function can be used only when you scroll a
- window by moving the cursor up/down in Cursor movement of Key assignment. You
- cannot execute this function if any macros are in execution or any files are
- being loaded/saved/replaced in the target window.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Select
- Execute the scroll with other FWE.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.20. Compare with other FWE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Select a window you want to compare with the editing window in the
- list. You cannot execute this function if any macros are in execution
- or any files are being loaded/saved/replaced in the target window.
-
- 2. Select the position to start comparing.
-
- Cursor position
- Starts comparing at the current cursor positions in each window.
-
- Cursor line
- Starts comparing at the line (the physical line) that contains
- the cursor position in each window.
-
- Top of file
- Starts comparing at the first line of each file.
-
- 3. Select a way of comparing.
-
- Compare to bottom of file
- Compares the contents until it reaches the end of the files and
- displays the result in another FWE window. This cannot be used
- when the maximum number of the FWE windows have been activated.
-
- Jump to different position
- Moves the cursor to the first difference.
-
- 4. Press the "Ok" button.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Ok
- Execute file compare.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.21. Execute program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Specify a name for the program you want to execute.
-
- 2. Enter a program you want to execute. Enter * to execute a command
- prompt. Press the "Refer" button to show a file dialog box where you
- can select a program you want to execute.
-
- 3. Specify an argument to execute the program. When you execute a
- command file, specify * for the program you want to execute and
- specify /C command filename in this item. You can use the following
- simple macros:
-
- %F Execute the program in the directory with the editing file
- pathname. When the file has no name, you will get an error.
-
- %N Executes the program in the directory with the editing
- filename. When the file has no name, you will get an error.
-
- %P Executes the program in the directory with the directory name
- that contains the editing file. The directory name has to end
- with \.
-
- %% Executes the program in the directory with % character. When
- the specified argument is the same as any of the macros shown
- above, you need to specify the % character correctly in this
- macro.
-
- 4. Repeat 1 - 3 shown above for each program you want to execute.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Save
- Saves the contents that have been specified.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.22. User-defined keyword ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- 1. Select a keyword file.
-
- 2. Press the "Select" button.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Select
- Displays Keyword Setting dialog.
-
- Delete
- Delete a select file.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.23. User-defined help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Usage dialog:
-
- Select a function you want to use in the menus from the list of [Items not
- used] and press the "Add" button. Then enter a menu heading which is to be
- displayed with the menu and press the "Set" button to relate the heading to the
- menu. When all items are specified, press the "Save" button to save the
- settings.
-
- [Items used] displays the list of items that are displayed in the menus.
- [Items not used] displays the list of items that are not displayed in the
- menus.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Add
- Adds an item selected in the list of [Items not displayed] to the end
- of the list of [Items displayed].
-
- Above button
- Adds an item selected in the list of [Items not displayed] above the
- item selected in the list of [Items displayed].
-
- Below button
- Adds an item selected in the list of [Items not displayed] below the
- item selected in the list of [Items displayed].
-
- Delete
- Deletes a selected item from the list of [Items displayed].
-
- Save
- Save user-defined help.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.24. Configuration - Add file extensions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Enter only extensions. The multiple extensions can be specified with a blank
- character to separate them.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Ok
- Add file extensions in configuration.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15.25. Save environment, key Assignment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Select a way to save settings. You can save the settings by overwriting the
- active configuration file or by creating another configuration file. When you
- save the settings in another configuration file, enter the proper filename and
- comment.
-
- The configurations you have saved in this function can be used in
- Configuration by being automatically switched by the file extensions.
-
- Each button in the dialog boxes controls the following:БD
-
- Ok
- Saves the contents that have been specified.
-
- Cancel
- Decide not to change the current settings.
-
- Help
- Displays the this help file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. Macro ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Macros have to be written in the REXX language and saved in the files with
- .MAC extensions. You can select "Execute" in the macro menu to use the macros
- you have created. You can also Register the macros in the macro menu, so that
- you can assign the macros to keys in Key assignment or to toolbar menus and
- pop-up menus in Environment.
-
- Mechanism of FWE macros (related to REXX)
- FWE macros are written with some FWE's unique REXX functions in addition
- to the REXX language. Since you can basically use all the functions that
- can be used in the REXX language, you can use the powerful commands of the
- REXX language such as text processing.
-
- Here is the primary difference between FWE macros and the REXX language.
- The programs which are written in the REXX language, in most cases, are
- executed with the OS/2 command prompts. In this case, all the screen
- output is displayed through the OS/2 command prompts and all the keystrokes
- are also input through the OS/2 command prompts. On the other hand, since
- FWE macros are executed with FWE, this console (the OS/2 command prompts)
- cannot be used. Without this console, you cannot display messages nor
- input the date with keystrokes, which will lose macro's advantages.
- Instead, FWE has a virtual console, which processes the input/output of the
- REXX language. The virtual console controls almost the same functions as
- the real console does but has the following differences:
-
- 1. With the virtual console, the output character strings are
- displayed in another FWE window when the macro execution is
- completed. The output character strings are stored in Output area.
-
- 2. When a prompt function is invoked, you are required to enter a
- command in a dialog box.
-
- As you can see above, you won't know what to enter in the dialog box that
- FWE shows when a prompt function is invoked, since the output character
- strings are not displayed until the macro execution has been completed. In
- order to solve this problem, FWE is equipped with a function that controls
- the output data other than "Output area". That is called Message output
- area. The message output area covers only the "Say" functions of REXX and
- controls the output character strings that are called by the "Say"
- functions.
-
- Up to three lines of character strings (text) can be stored in the message
- output area. When REXX requires an input (when the "Pull" function is
- invoked), the character strings that are stored in this area are displayed
- in the input dialog box as a text to show the input data. The character
- strings in the message output area will be cleared once they are used in an
- input dialog box. When more than three lines of character strings are sent
- to the message output area, the oldest text will be deleted.
-
- Since FWE functions (commands) are automatically loaded with macro
- execution, you don't have to use macro programs to load the functions.
- Other functions and commands, as well as in the REXX language, need to be
- loaded before used.
-
- Important information
- The FWE setup directory is used as the initial directory for macro
- execution. If you have changed any directories in a macro, you need to set
- them back to the original directories before the macro execution is
- completed; otherwise the directories in other windows will be also changed
- because OS/2 manages the directories by the process, not by the thread.
-
- When you use the DOS/V (PC-DOS) program at the same time with the FWE
- macro execution, the "IDLE_SENSITIVITY" value should be set to under 40 in
- the DOS setting. (Default:75)
-
- Refer to the function list or check in the following function groups for the
- FWE macro functions:
-
- Cursor movement
- Macro functions to control cursor movement
-
- Delete
- Macro functions to delete text
-
- Insert
- Macro functions to insert text
-
- Edit
- Macro functions to edit text
-
- Window
- Macro functions to work on windows
-
- Inquiry
- Macro functions for inquiries
-
- Other
- Other macro functions
-
- Refer to the following macros that are included in the FWE archive file for
- the samples of the FWE macros:
-
- Macros to call the compiler (Compile:Mac)
- Macros to input the system date/time (InpDate:Mac/InpTime:Mac)
- Macros to split a text at the specified column (Split:Mac)
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1. Function list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Select a function you want to refer to:
-
- FweAddCopy
- FweAddCut
- FweAddRing
- FweAllSave
- FweBackSpace
- FweBackTab
- FweBottom
- FweBottomInScreen
- FweChangeCase
- FweChangeCaseWord
- FweChangeWindow
- FweClearLog
- FweClearStack
- FweCloseOpen
- FweColumnLeft
- FweColumnRight
- FweCopy
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCut
- FweCutToStack
- FweDelete
- FweDeleteAfter
- FweDeleteBefore
- FweDeleteLine
- FweDeleteWord
- FweDeleteWordAfter
- FweDeleteWordBefore
- FweDown
- FweDupLine
- FweEnableUpdate
- FweExecPgm
- FweExpandWordCopy
- FweExpandWordPaste
- FweFill
- FweFind
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
- FweForceSave
- FweFuncList
- FweFuncNext
- FweFuncPrev
- FweGrep
- FweHarfPageDown
- FweHarfPageLeft
- FweHarfPageRight
- FweHarfPageUp
- FweImport
- FweInput
- FweInputReturn
- FweInputTab
- FweInsert
- FweInsertLineBelow
- FweInsertLineUp
- FweInsertNewLine
- FweInsertUseMark
- FweJoinLine
- FweJump
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweJumpPare
- FweLastPos
- FweLeft
- FweLineDown
- FweLineUp
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FweMarkPos
- FweNew
- FweNextWord
- FweOpen
- FwePageDown
- FwePageLeft
- FwePageRight
- FwePageUp
- FwePaste
- FwePasteFromDelStackPop
- FwePasteFromStack
- FwePasteFromStackPop
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FwePopFromStack
- FwePostitList
- FwePostitNext
- FwePostitPrev
- FwePrevWord
- FwePrint
- FweQueryBottomNo
- FweQueryChar
- FweQueryCharType
- FweQueryCode
- FweQueryDir
- FweQueryEditMode
- FweQueryInClipBrd
- FweQueryInsert
- FweQueryMarkLineX
- FweQueryMoveCur
- FweQueryMarkLineY
- FweQueryName
- FweQueryOptions
- FweQueryPosX
- FweQueryPosY
- FweQuerySelEndX
- FweQuerySelEndY
- FweQuerySelStartX
- FweQuerySelStartY
- FweQuerySelText
- FweQuerySelTextLen
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweQueryText
- FweQueryTextLength
- FweQueryTopNo
- FweQueryUndo
- FweQueryWindowFromName
- FweQueryWinHeight
- FweQueryWinLines
- FweQueryWinPosX
- FweQueryWinPosY
- FweQueryWinWidth
- FweQueryX
- FweQueryY
- FweRedo
- FweReload
- FweReplace
- FweReturn
- FweRight
- FweSave
- FweSaveAs
- FweSelect
- FweSelectAll
- FweSelectBlock
- FweSelectCancel
- FweSelectExpand
- FweSelectLine
- FweSelectWord
- FweSetCode
- FweSetFocus
- FweSetInClipBrd
- FweSetOptions
- FweSetTopNo
- FweSetWinPos
- FweSetWinSize
- FweSplitLine
- FweSwitchEditMode
- FweTab
- FweToLower
- FweToUpper
- FweTop
- FweTopInScreen
- FweUndo
- FweUndoAll
- FweUndoLine
- FweUp
- FweUseMarkCopy
- FweUseMarkCopyToStack
- FweUseMarkPaste
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop
- FweWinCascade
- FweWinIcon
- FweWinNextInRing
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.1. FweAddCopy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweAddCopy
-
- Comment
- Add the selected information to the text of the clipboard. When there is
- no selected area, the cursor line will be added to the clipboard.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddCut
- FweCopy
- FweCut
- FwePaste
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweUseMarkCopy
- FweUseMarkPaste
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweAddCopy()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.2. FweAddCut ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweAddCut
-
- Comment
- Cuts the selected text and appends it to the end of the clipboard. The
- text will be deleted from the editing file. When a block is selected, it
- is cut to the clipboard replacing any existing clipboard contents. When no
- text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is cut to the
- clipboard. (This default command can be turned off in the Other page of
- Environment.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddCopy
- FweCopy
- FweCut
- FwePaste
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweUseMarkCopy
- FweUseMarkPaste
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweAddCut()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.3. FweAddRing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweAddRing [file [, y [, x [, noEdit] ] ] ]
-
- Argument(s)
- file Specify a filename you want to add.
- y Specify the line position of the cursor right after a file is
- opened. (You will get the last line when you specify a value of -1
- or more than 1.)
- x Specify the column position of the cursor right after a file is
- opened. (The value has to be more than 1)
- noEdit Specify a value other than 0 to prohibit editing.
-
- Comment
- Adds a file to the ring.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAllSave
- FweCloseOpen
- FweImport
- FweNew
- FweOpen
- FweSave
- FweSaveAs
- FweWinNextInRing
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweAddRing( 'Config.Sys' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.4. FweAllSave ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweAllSave
-
- Comment
- Saves all the editing files under the same fields.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweNew
- FweOpen
- FweQueryCode
- FweSave
- FweSaveAs
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweAllSave()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.5. FweBackSpace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweBackSpace [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of delete characters.
-
- Comment
- Deletes a character to the left of the cursor position.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When can not delete characters of specified count, the value of -1 is
- returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweDelete
- FweDeleteAfter
- FweDeleteBefore
- FweDeleteLine
- FweDeleteWord
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweBackSpace( 2 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.6. FweBackTab ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweBackTab [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of Backtab
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the left by the tab size that is specified in the
- Window page of Environment.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When can not move, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBottom
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FweRight
- FweTab
- FweTop
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweBackTab()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.7. FweBottom ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweBottom
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the bottom of a file.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBottomInScreen
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FweQueryMoveCur
- FweRight
- FweTop
- FweTopInScreen
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweBottom()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.8. FweBottomInScreen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweBottomInScreen
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the bottom line that is shown in the current screen.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBottom
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweRight
- FweTop
- FweTopInScreen
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweBottomInScreen()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.9. FweChangeCase ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweChangeCase
-
- Comment
- Converts the character at the cursor position to the uppercase/lowercase
- character and moves the cursor to the right by one character. When a text
- is selected, alphabetical characters in the selected text are converted to
- the uppercase/lowercase, and the cursor doesn't move.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweChangeCaseWord
- FweToLower
- FweToUpper
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweChangeCase()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.10. FweChangeCaseWord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweChangeCaseWord
-
- Comment
- Converts the first alphabetical character in the selected text to the
- uppercase/lowercase character and accords all the letters of the word at
- the cursor position to the case character you converted the first character
- to. (The default can be changed to a command so that only the part of the
- word after the cursor position is converted. - in the Other page of
- Environment.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweChangeCase
- FweToLower
- FweToUpper
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweChangeCaseWord()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.11. FweChangeWindow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweChangeWindow [file] [win-id]
-
- Argument(s)
- file Specify a pathname of the target window you want to change to.
- win-id Specify a window extension that is returned by the function
- "FweChangeWindow". When this argument is specified, you have to
- specify " or "" for the file argument.
-
- Comment
- You can switch the windows that are operated with macros.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- A value other than 0 will be returned when you cannot find a target window
- or you cannot switch the windows with the macro execution or another
- problem.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryWindowFromName
- FweSetFocus
- FweWinNextInRing
-
- Example1)
-
- rc = FweChangeWindow( 'C:\Config.Sys' )
-
- Example2)
-
- szFile = 'D:\CONFIG.SYS';
- rcInfo = FweQueryWindowFromName( szFile );
-
- if length(rcInfo) > 4 then do
- rc = FweChangeWindow( "", SubStr( rcInfo, 5 ) );
- end;
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.12. FweClearLog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweClearLog [option]
-
- Argument(s)
- option Specify the following values.
- 0 Clears the contents that have been output to the virtual console and
- the message output area.
- 1 Clears only the contents that have been output to the message output
- area.
-
- Comment
- You can clear the contents that have been output from the REXX macros to
- the standard output (the output area of a virtual console). Or you can
- clear only the message output area without clearing the contents of the
- standard output area.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- None.
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweClearLog( 1 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.13. FweClearStack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweClearStack
-
- Comment
- Deletes all the items in the stack.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCutToStack
- FwePasteFromStack
- FwePasteFromDelStack
- FwePasteFromStackPop
- FwePopFromStack
- FweUseMarkCopyToStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweClearStack()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.14. FweCloseOpen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweCloseOpen [file [, y [, x [, noEdit] ] ] ]
-
- Argument(s)
- file Specify a filename you want to add.
- y Specify the line position of the cursor right after a file is
- opened. (You will get the last line when you specify a value of -1
- or more than 1.)
- x Specify the column position of the cursor right after a file is
- opened. (The value has to be more than 1)
- noEdit Specify a value other than 0 to prohibit editing.
-
- Comment
- Closes the current file and opens a new file in the same window.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddRing
- FweAllSave
- FweImport
- FweNew
- FweOpen
- FweSave
- FweSaveAs
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweCloseOpen( 'Config.Sys' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.15. FweColumnLeft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweColumnLeft [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of columns
-
- Comment
- Scrolls a column to the left.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when the cursor cannot be moved.
-
- Related functions
- FweColumnRight
- FweHarfPageRight
- FweHarfPageRight
- FwePageLeft
- FwePageRight
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweColumnLeft()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.16. FweColumnRight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweColumnRight [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of columns
-
- Comment
- Scrolls a column to the right.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when the cursor cannot be moved.
-
- Related functions
- FweColumnLeft
- FweHarfPageRight
- FweHarfPageRight
- FwePageLeft
- FwePageRight
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweColumnRight()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.17. FweCopy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweCopy
-
- Comment
- Copies the selected text to the clipboard. Normal/line/block are copied to
- the clipboard in the same way. When no text is selected, the line that
- contains the cursor position is copied to the clipboard. (This default
- command can be turned off in the Other page of Environment.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddCopy
- FweAddCut
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCut
- FweCutToStack
- FweExpandWordCopy
- FwePaste
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweUseMarkCopy
- FweUseMarkPaste
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweCopy()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.18. FweCopyToFindStack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweCopyToFindStack
-
- Comment
- Copies the selected text to the search string stack.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddCopy
- FweAddCut
- FweClearStack
- FweCopy
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCut
- FweCutToStack
- FweExpandWordCopy
- FwePaste
- FwePasteFromDelStack
- FwePasteFromStack
- FwePasteFromStackPop
- FwePopFromStack
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweUseMarkCopy
- FweUseMarkCopyToStack
- FweUseMarkPaste
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweCopyToFindStack()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.19. FweCopyToStack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweCopyToStack
-
- Comment
- Copies the selected text to the stack. Normal/line/block are copied to the
- stack in the same way. When no text is selected, the line that contains
- the cursor position is copied to the stack. (This default command can be
- turned off in the Other page of Environment.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddCopy
- FweAddCut
- FweClearStack
- FweCopy
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCut
- FweCutToStack
- FweExpandWordCopy
- FwePaste
- FwePasteFromDelStack
- FwePasteFromStack
- FwePasteFromStackPop
- FwePopFromStack
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweUseMarkCopy
- FweUseMarkCopyToStack
- FweUseMarkPaste
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweCopyToStack()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.20. FweCut ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweCut
-
- Comment
- Cuts the selected text to the clipboard. The text will be deleted from the
- editing file. Normal/line/block are cut to the clipboard in the same way.
- When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is cut
- to the clipboard. (This default command can be turned off in the Other
- page of Environment.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddCopy
- FweAddCut
- FweCopy
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCutToStack
- FwePaste
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweUseMarkCopy
- FweUseMarkPaste
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweCut()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.21. FweCutToStack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweCutToStack
-
- Comment
- Cuts the selected text to the stack. The text will be deleted from the
- editing file. Normal/line/block are cut to the stack in the same way.
- When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is cut
- to the stack. (This default command can be turned off in the Other page of
- Environment.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddCopy
- FweAddCut
- FweClearStack
- FweCopy
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCut
- FwePaste
- FwePasteFromDelStack
- FwePasteFromStack
- FwePasteFromStackPop
- FwePopFromStack
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweUseMarkCopy
- FweUseMarkCopyToStack
- FweUseMarkPaste
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweCutToStack()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.22. FweDelete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweDelete [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of delete characters
-
- Comment
- Deletes a character at the cursor position.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When can not delete characters of specified count, the value of -1 is
- returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBackSpace
- FweDeleteAfter
- FweDeleteBefore
- FweDeleteLine
- FweDeleteWord
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweDelete( 2 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.23. FweDeleteAfter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweDeleteAfter
-
- Comment
- Deletes all the characters after the cursor position in the cursor line.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBackSpace
- FweDelete
- FweDeleteAfter
- FweDeleteBefore
- FweDeleteLine
- FweDeleteWord
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweDeleteAfter()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.24. FweDeleteBefore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweDeleteBefore
-
- Comment
- Deletes all the characters before the cursor position in the cursor line.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBackSpace
- FweDelete
- FweDeleteAfter
- FweDeleteLine
- FweDeleteWord
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweDeleteBefore()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.25. FweDeleteLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweDeleteLine [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of delete lines
-
- Comment
- Deletes a logical line at the cursor position.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBackSpace
- FweDelete
- FweDeleteAfter
- FweDeleteBefore
- FweDeleteWord
- FweJoinLine
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweDeleteLine( 5 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.26. FweDeleteWord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweDeleteWord [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of delete words
-
- Comment
- Deletes the word at the cursor position. Refer to Identify word to see how
- to identify the word to be deleted.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBackSpace
- FweDelete
- FweDeleteLine
- FweDeleteWordAfter
- FweDeleteWordBefore
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweDeleteWord()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.27. FweDeleteWordAfter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweDeleteWordAfter
-
- Comment
- Deletes the word at the cursor position only from the cursor position to
- the end of the word. Refer to Identify word to see how to identify the
- word to be deleted.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBackSpace
- FweDelete
- FweDeleteLine
- FweDeleteWord
- FweDeleteWordBefore
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweDeleteWordAfter()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.28. FweDeleteWordBefore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweDeleteWordBefore
-
- Comment
- Deletes the word at the cursor position only from the top of the word to
- the character before the cursor position. Refer to Identify word to see
- how to identify the word to be deleted.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBackSpace
- FweDelete
- FweDeleteLine
- FweDeleteWord
- FweDeleteWordAfter
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweDeleteWordBefore()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.29. FweDown ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweDown [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of lines
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor one line down.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBackTab
- FweBottom
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FweQueryMoveCur
- FweRight
- FweInput
- FweTab
- FweTop
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweDown()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.30. FweDupLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweDupLine [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of copies
-
- Comment
- Inserts a logical line with the same contents as those of the cursor line
- under the cursor line. When a text is selected, a new line with the same
- contents as those of the selected text is inserted under the selected text.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweDeleteLine
- FweInsertLineBelow
- FweInsertLineUp
- FweInsertNewLine
- FweJoinLine
- FweSplitLine
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweDupLine( 3 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.31. FweEnableUpdate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweEnableUpdate [yesno]
-
- Argument(s)
- yesno Specify the following values.
- 0 Prohibits updating the window.
- 1 Prohibits updating the window and the status line.
- 2 Enables updating.
-
- Comment
- You can set the update mode (on/off) while macros are in execution.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- None
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweEnableUpdate( 0 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.32. FweExecPgm ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweExecPgm kind [, program [, argment] ]
-
- Argument(s)
- kind Specify 0 - 10.
- program Specify the pathname of the executing program.
- argment Specify the argument to execute the program.
-
- Comment
- You can execute a specified program in another session.
-
- When a number of 1 - 10 is specified in the argument "kind", the specified
- program will be executed by the argument of a program that is registered in
- the "Execute program" setting. (Other arguments will be ignored.)
-
- When 0 is specified in the argument "kind", you need to specify a program
- name you want to execute and the argument to execute the program if needed.
- You can use a simple macro that can be specified in the "Execute program"
- setting for an argument to execute a program.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- None
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweExecPgm( 0, '*' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.33. FweExpandWordCopy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweExpandWordCopy [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of words
-
- Comment
- At first, the word after the cursor position is copied to the search string
- stack. Then the next words are copied and added to the search string stack
- successively.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweExpandWordPaste
- FwePaste
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweExpandWordCopy( 3 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.34. FweExpandWordPaste ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweExpandWordPaste
-
- Comment
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the search string stack at the
- cursor position of the file.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FwePaste
- FweExpandWordCopy
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweExpandWordPaste()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.35. FweFill ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweFill [pad]
-
- Argument(s)
- pad character
-
- Comment
- Fills the selected text with copies of the specified character.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSelect
- FweSelectAll
- FweSelectBlock
- FweSelectLine
- FweSelectWord
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweFill( ' ' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.36. FweFind ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweFind string, option
-
- Argument(s)
- string Specify a search string
- option Specify the following values in a logical OR (or an OR operation).
- 1 Ignores uppercase/lowercase.
- 2 Searches for a word.
- 4 Uses regular expression.
- 8 Searches only in the selected area.
- 16 Searches in the whole document.
- 32 Ignores SBCS/DBCS characters. (Japanese only)
-
- Comment
- You can register specified character strings and search options.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when a process is cancelled.
-
- Related functions
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
- FweJump
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweJumpPare
- FweLastPos
- FweMarkPos
- FwePostitList
- FwePostitNext
- FwePostitPrev
- FweReplace
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweFind( 'ABCD' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.37. FweFindNext ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweFindNext
-
- Comment
- Searches in the text after the cursor position. When no search string is
- specified, a find dialog box is displayed.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When can not find specified string, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFind
- FweFindPrev
- FweJump
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweJumpPare
- FweLastPos
- FweMarkPos
- FwePostitList
- FwePostitNext
- FwePostitPrev
- FweReplace
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweFindNext()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.38. FweFindPrev ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweFindPrev
-
- Comment
- Searches in the text before the cursor position. When no search string is
- specified, a find dialog box is displayed.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When can not find specified string, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFind
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
- FweJump
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweJumpPare
- FweLastPos
- FweMarkPos
- FwePostitList
- FwePostitNext
- FwePostitPrev
- FweReplace
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweFindPrev()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.39. FweForceSave ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweForceSave
-
- Comment
- Forces FWE to save the editing file.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAllSave
- FweNew
- FweOpen
- FweQueryCode
- FweReload
- FweSave
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweForceSave
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.40. FweFuncList ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweFuncList
-
- Comment
- Lists all the functions in the editing file. Some settings need to be
- configured before you use this function. Refer to the function search
- section to configure the settings.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFuncNext
- FweFuncPrev
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweFuncList
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.41. FweFuncNext ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweFuncNext
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the function that is shown after the cursor position.
- (below the cursor position on the screen.) This can be used when you edit
- a file with an extension which is related to a keyword written in a
- language such as C/C++, Java, Pascal, Basic, or Rexx in the Search
- information page of Keywords.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFuncList
- FweFuncPrev
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweFuncNext
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.42. FweFuncPrev ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweFuncPrev
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the function that is shown before the cursor position.
- (above the cursor position on the screen.) This can be used when you edit
- a file with an extension which is related to a keyword written in a
- language such as C/C++, Java, Pascal, Basic, or Rexx in the Search
- information page of Keywords.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFuncList
- FweFuncNext
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweFuncPrev
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.43. FweGrep ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweGrep pattern, pathname, options
-
- Argument(s)
- pattern Specify a search pattern.
- pathname Specify a pathname you want to search for.
- options Specify the following values in a logical OR (or an OR
- operation).
- 1 Ignores uppercase/lowercase.
- 2 Searches for a word.
- 4 Uses regular expression.
- 8 Ignores SBCS/DBCS characters. (Japanese only)
- 16 Includes the subdirectories for searches.
-
- Comment
- Executes grep to search for strings in multiple files.
-
- Return value
- Normal terminationОЮ:The number that found a pattern will be returned.
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFind
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweGrep("SET", "CONFIG.SYS", 0)
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.44. FweHarfPageDown ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweHarfPageDown [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of half-pages
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor down to the next page by one-half of the window.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when the cursor cannot be moved.
-
- Related functions
- FweHarfPageLeft
- FweHarfPageRight
- FweHarfPageUp
- FweLineDown
- FweLineUp
- FwePageDown
- FwePageLeft
- FwePageRight
- FwePageUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweHarfPageDown()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.45. FweHarfPageLeft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweHarfPageLeft [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of half-pages
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the left by one-half of the window.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when the cursor cannot be moved.
-
- Related functions
- FweColumnLeft
- FweColumnRight
- FweHarfPageDown
- FweHarfPageRight
- FweHarfPageUp
- FwePageDown
- FwePageLeft
- FwePageRight
- FwePageUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweHarfPageLeft()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.46. FweHarfPageRight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweHarfPageRight [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of half-pages
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the right by one-half of the window.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when the cursor cannot be moved.
-
- Related functions
- FweColumnLeft
- FweColumnRight
- FweHarfPageDown
- FweHarfPageLeft
- FweHarfPageUp
- FwePageDown
- FwePageLeft
- FwePageRight
- FwePageUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweHarfPageRight()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.47. FweHarfPageUp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweHarfPageUp [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of half-pages
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor up to the previous page by the full window size.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when the cursor cannot be moved.
-
- Related functions
- FweHarfPageDown
- FweHarfPageLeft
- FweHarfPageRight
- FweLineDown
- FweLineUp
- FwePageDown
- FwePageLeft
- FwePageRight
- FwePageUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweHarfPageUp()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.48. FweImport ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweImport [file]
-
- Argument(s)
- file Load file name
-
- Comment
- Imports a file at the cursor position and adds it to the current editing
- file.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddRing
- FweAllSave
- FweCloseOpen
- FweNew
- FweOpen
- FweSave
- FweSaveAs
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweImport( 'Config.Sys' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.49. FweInput ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweInput string [[, count] [, pad] ]
-
- Argument(s)
- string Specify a character string you want to input.
- count Specify the number of characters you want to input.
- pad Specify a character to fill the space when "string" is shorter than
- "count".
-
- Comment
- You can input a specified character string with the specified length at the
- cursor position. If the number of characters to be input is not specified,
- the whole part of the character string that is specified in "string" will
- be input. If the character string that is specified in "string" is
- shorter than the number of characters to be input, the pad characters will
- fill the space.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweInputReturn
- FweInputTab
- FweInsert
- FweQueryChar
- FweQueryCharType
- FweQueryEditMode
- FweQueryText
- FweQueryTextLength
- FweUndo
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweInput( 'ABCD' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.50. FweInputReturn ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweInputReturn [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of return characters
-
- Comment
- Inputs a carriage return character at the cursor position and moves the
- cursor to the next line. The characters after the cursor position are
- pushed to the next line (to the cursor line after the execution.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweInput
- FweInputTab
- FweInsertLineBelow
- FweInsertLineUp
- FweInsertNewLine
- FweQueryEditMode
- FweReturn
- FweSplitLine
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweInputReturn()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.51. FweInputTab ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweInputTab [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of tab characters
-
- Comment
- Inputs a tab character at the cursor position. Select Tab in the Cursor
- page to move the cursor by the tab size.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweInput
- FweInputReturn
- FweInsertLineBelow
- FweInsertLineUp
- FweInsertNewLine
- FweQueryEditMode
- FweReturn
- FweSplitLine
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweInputTab()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.52. FweInsert ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweInsert
-
- Comment
- Toggles the typing mode (insert/overwrite).
-
- Return value
- Normal termination : 0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweInput
- FweQueryInsert
-
- Example)
-
- code = FweInsert()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.53. FweInsertLineBelow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweInsertLineBelow [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of lines
-
- Comment
- Inserts a new line under the cursor line. The cursor stays in the same
- position.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweDeleteLine
- FweDupLine
- FweInsertLineUp
- FweInsertNewLine
- FweJoinLine
- FweReturn
- FweSplitLine
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweInsertLineBelow( 2 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.54. FweInsertLineUp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweInsertLineUp [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of lines
-
- Comment
- Inserts a new line above the cursor line with an indent according to the
- indent of the cursor line, and moves the cursor to the inserted line.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweDeleteLine
- FweDupLine
- FweInsertLineBelow
- FweJoinLine
- FweReturn
- FweSplitLine
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweInsertLineUp()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.55. FweInsertNewLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweInsertNewLine [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of lines
-
- Comment
- You can insert a new line above the cursor line with an indent according to
- the indent of the cursor line, and move the cursor to the inserted line.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweDeleteLine
- FweDupLine
- FweInsertLineBelow
- FweJoinLine
- FweReturn
- FweSplitLine
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweInsertNewLine()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.56. FweInsertUseMark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweInsertUseMark
-
- Comment
- Inserts a quotation mark at the top of the cursor line. When a text is
- selected, this function works on the selected text.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when there is no selected area or when an error
- occurs while executing a process.
-
- Related functions
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSetOptions
- FweUseMarkCopy
- FweUseMarkPaste
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweInsertUseMark()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.57. FweJoinLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweJoinLine [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of lines
-
- Comment
- Joins the physical line at the cursor position with the next physical line.
- This function works the same way as deleting the CR character at the end of
- the cursor line.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweDeleteLine
- FweDupLine
- FweInsertLineBelow
- FweInsertLineUp
- FweInsertNewLine
- FweSplitLine
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweJoinLine( 5 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.58. FweJump ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweJump y [x, [option] ]
-
- Argument(s)
- y Specify the line number of the target position you want to jump the
- cursor to.
- x Specify the column number of the target position you want to jump the
- cursor to.
- option Specify the following values.
- 0 Normal jump (The target position depends on the way to count line
- numbers.)
- 1 Jump at the physical cursor position.
- 2 Jump at the logical cursor position (The target position depends on
- the column number to wrap lines.)
-
- Comment
- You can move the cursor to the specified line "y" and column "x". The
- numbers for the line and column positions have to be more than 1. When 0
- is specified, the cursor doesn't move from the current position. If the
- target cursor position happens to be in the middle of TAB or at the second
- byte of the DBCS character, the cursor may be moved to a different position
- from the specified position. If you didn't specify the column position (x)
- of the argument, 0 is specified instead.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFind
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
- FweFindGrep
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweLastPos
- FweMarkPos
- FwePostitList
- FwePostitNext
- FwePostitPrev
- FweReplace
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweJump( 10, 5 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.59. FweJumpMarkPos ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweJumpMarkPos [index]
-
- Argument(s)
- index Index of mark (1 - 5)
-
- Comment
- Jumps to the cursor position that is marked in a specified number.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an cancel in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFind
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
- FweFindGrep
- FweJump
- FweLastPos
- FweMarkPos
- FwePostitList
- FwePostitNext
- FwePostitPrev
- FweQueryMarkLineX
- FweQueryMarkLineY
- FweReplace
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweJumpMarkPos( 1 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.60. FweJumpPare ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweJumpPare
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the parentheses (a character string) that are
- corresponding to the parentheses (a character string) of the cursor
- position. The parentheses (a character string) need to be specified in the
- Expansion page of Keywords.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an cancel in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFind
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweJumpPare()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.61. FweLastPos ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweLastPos
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the last position of the editing.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFind
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
- FweFindGrep
- FweJump
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweMarkPos
- FwePostitList
- FwePostitNext
- FwePostitPrev
- FweReplace
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweLastPos()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.62. FweLeft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweLeft [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of columns
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor one column left.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBackTab
- FweBottom
- FweDown
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FweNextWord
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FwePrevWord
- FweQueryMoveCur
- FweRight
- FweInput
- FweTab
- FweTop
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweLeft()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.63. FweLineDown ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweLineDown [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of lines
-
- Comment
- Scrolls a line down.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when the cursor cannot be moved.
-
- Related functions
- FweHarfPageDown
- FweHarfPageUp
- FweLineUp
- FwePageDown
- FwePageUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweLineDown( 2 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.64. FweLineUp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweLineUp [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of lines
-
- Comment
- Scrolls a line up.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when the cursor cannot be moved.
-
- Related functions
- FweHarfPageDown
- FweHarfPageUp
- FweLineDown
- FwePageDown
- FwePageUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweLineUp( 2 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.65. FweLocLineEnd ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweLocLineEnd
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the last column of a logical line.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBottom
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineTop
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FweRight
- FweTop
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweLocLineEnd()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.66. FweLocLineTop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweLocLineTop
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the last column of a logical line.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBottom
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineEnd
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FweRight
- FweTop
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweLocLineTop()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.67. FweMarkPos ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweMarkPos [index]
-
- Argument(s)
- index Index of mark (1 - 5)
-
- Comment
- Marks the current cursor position.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an cancel in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFind
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
- FweFindGrep
- FweJump
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweLastPos
- FwePostitList
- FwePostitNext
- FwePostitPrev
- FweQueryMarkLineX
- FweQueryMarkLineY
- FweReplace
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweMarkPos( 'ABCD' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.68. FweNew ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweNew
-
- Comment
- Creates a new file to edit.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddRing
- FweAllSave
- FweCloseOpen
- FweImport
- FweOpen
- FweSave
- FweSaveAs
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweNew()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.69. FweNextWord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweNextWord [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of words
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the next word. Refer to Identify word to see how to
- move the cursor.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FweNextWord
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FwePrevWord
- FweRight
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweNextWord()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.70. FweOpen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweOpen [file [, y [, x [, noEdit [, macro [, margs] ] ] ] ] ]
-
- Argument(s)
- file Specify a filename you want to add.
- y Specify the line position of the cursor right after a file is
- opened. (You will get the last line when you specify a value of -1
- or more than 1.)
- x Specify the column position of the cursor right after a file is
- opened. (The value has to be more than 1)
- noEdit Specify a value other than 0 to prohibit editing.
- macro Specify the macro name that is to be executed right after a file is
- opened. margsSpecify the argument to activate the macro you want to
- execute.
-
- Comment
- Open a file to edit.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddRing
- FweAllSave
- FweCloseOpen
- FweImport
- FweNew
- FweReload
- FweSave
- FweSaveAs
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweOpen( 'Config.Sys' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.71. FwePageDown ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePageDown [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of pages
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor down to the next page by the full window size.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when the cursor cannot be moved.
-
- Related functions
- FweHarfPageDown
- FweHarfPageLeft
- FweHarfPageRight
- FweHarfPageUp
- FweLineDown
- FweLineUp
- FwePageLeft
- FwePageRight
- FwePageUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePageDown()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.72. FwePageLeft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePageLeft [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of pages
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the left by the full window size.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when the cursor cannot be moved.
-
- Related functions
- FweColumnLeft
- FweColumnRight
- FweHarfPageDown
- FweHarfPageLeft
- FweHarfPageRight
- FweHarfPageUp
- FwePageDown
- FwePageRight
- FwePageUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePageLeft()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.73. FwePageRight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePageRight [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of pages
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the right by the full window size.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when the cursor cannot be moved.
-
- Related functions
- FweColumnLeft
- FweColumnRight
- FweHarfPageDown
- FweHarfPageLeft
- FweHarfPageRight
- FweHarfPageUp
- FwePageDown
- FwePageLeft
- FwePageUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePageRight()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.74. FwePageUp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePageUp [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of pages
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor up to the previous page by the full window size.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when the cursor cannot be moved.
-
- Related functions
- FweHarfPageDown
- FweHarfPageLeft
- FweHarfPageRight
- FweHarfPageUp
- FweLineDown
- FweLineUp
- FwePageDown
- FwePageLeft
- FwePageRight
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePageUp()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.75. FwePaste ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePaste
-
- Comment
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the clipboard at the cursor
- position. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block).
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddCopy
- FweAddCut
- FweCopy
- FweCut
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweUseMarkCopy
- FweUseMarkPaste
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePaste()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.76. FwePasteFromDelStackPop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePasteFromDelStackPop
-
- Comment
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the delete string stack at the
- cursor position.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweClearStack
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCutToStack
- FwePasteFromDelStack
- FwePasteFromStack
- FwePasteFromStackPop
- FwePopFromStack
- FweUseMarkCopyToStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStack
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePasteFromDelStackPop()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.77. FwePasteFromStack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePasteFromStack
-
- Comment
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position of
- the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each line. The contents are
- pasted according to the selected text (normal/line/block).
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddCopy
- FweAddCut
- FweClearStack
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCutToStack
- FwePopFromStack
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweUseMarkCopy
- FweUseMarkCopyToStack
- FweUseMarkPaste
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePasteFromStack()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.78. FwePasteFromStackPop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePasteFromStackPop
-
- Comment
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position of
- the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each line. The contents are
- pasted according to the selected text (normal/line/block). The contents
- are deleted from the stack after being pasted.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddCopy
- FweAddCut
- FweClearStack
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCutToStack
- FwePasteFromDelStack
- FwePopFromStack
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweUseMarkCopy
- FweUseMarkPaste
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePasteFromStackPop()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.79. FwePhyLineEnd ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePhyLineEnd
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the last column of a physical line.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBottom
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FwePhyLineTop
- FweRight
- FweTop
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePhyLineEnd()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.80. FwePhyLineTop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePhyLineTop
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the first column of a physical line.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBottom
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FweRight
- FweTop
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePhyLineTop()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.81. FwePopFromStack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePopFromStack
-
- Comment
- Deletes the first item of the stack (the item that is used when pasting).
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweClearStack
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCutToStack
- FwePopFromStack
- FweUseMarkCopyToStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePopFromStack()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.82. FwePostitList ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePostitList
-
- Comment
- Lists all the lines starting with Post it string that is specified in the
- Other page of Environment. (Also refer to Post it in the functions list.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an cancel in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFind
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
- FweFindGrep
- FweJump
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweLastPos
- FweMarkPos
- FwePostitNext
- FwePostitPrev
- FweReplace
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePostitList()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.83. FwePostitNext ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePostitNext
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the Post it string that is positioned after the cursor
- position. The "Post it string" is specified in the Other page of
- Environment. (Also refer to Post it in the functions list.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When can not found in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFind
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
- FweFindGrep
- FweJump
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweLastPos
- FweMarkPos
- FwePostitList
- FwePostitPrev
- FweReplace
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePostitNext()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.84. FwePostitPrev ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePostitPrev
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the Post it string that is positioned before the cursor
- position. The "Post it string" is specified in the Other page of
- Environment. (Also refer to Post it in the functions list.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When can not found in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFind
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
- FweFindGrep
- FweJump
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweLastPos
- FweMarkPos
- FwePostitList
- FwePostitNext
- FweReplace
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePostitPrev()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.85. FwePrevWord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePrevWord [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of words
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the previous word. Refer to Identify word to see how
- to move the cursor.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FweNextWord
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FweRight
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePrevWord()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.86. FwePrint ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FwePrint
-
- Comment
- Prints the editing text.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweOpen
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FwePrint()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.87. FweQueryBottomNo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryBottomNo
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the line number of the bottom line that is displayed
- in a window.
-
- Return value
- Return line number of the bottom line that is displayed in a window.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryTopNo
- FweQueryWinLines
- FweSetTopNo
- FweSetWinSize
-
- Example)
-
- no = FweQueryBottomNo()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.88. FweQueryChar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryChar
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the character at the cursor position.
-
- Return value
- The character at the cursor position will be returned. 0Ah will be
- returned when the cursor is on a CR character. (0Dh is not included.)
-
- Related functions
- FweInput
- FweQueryChar
- FweQueryCharType
- FweQueryText
- FweQueryTextLength
-
- Example)
-
- character = FweQueryChar()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.89. FweQueryCharType ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryCharType
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the character type at the cursor position.
-
- Return value
- Return character type at the cursor position.
-
- Related functions
- FweInput
- FweQueryChar
- FweQueryText
- FweQueryTextLength
-
- Example)
-
- type = FweQueryCharType()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.90. FweQueryCode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryCode
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the text code of a file when saving (loading) the
- file.
-
- Return value
- The following values will be returned.
- 0 Shift JIS code
- 1 EUC code
- 2 JIS code
-
- Related functions
- FweAllSave
- FweSave
- FweSaveAs
- FweSetCode
-
- Example)
-
- code = FweQueryCode()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.91. FweQueryDir ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryDir
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the path of the editing file.
-
- Return value
- Return the path of the editing file.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryName
- FweSaveAs
-
- Example)
-
- path = FweQueryDir()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.92. FweQueryEditMode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryEditMode
-
- Comment
- You can inquire if you can edit or not.
-
- Return value
- Editable : 0,
- Not-editable : Other than 0.
-
- Related functions
- FweSwitchEditMode
-
- Example)
-
- enable = FweQueryEditMode()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.93. FweQueryInClipBrd ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryInClipBrd
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the information on the text in the clipboard.
-
- Return value
- 0 No text in the clipboard
- 1 Text of normal selection
- 2 Text of line selection
- 3 Text of block selection
-
- Related functions
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSetInClipBrd
-
- Example)
-
- kind = FweQueryInClipBrd()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.94. FweQueryInsert ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryInsert
-
- Comment
- You can inquire if you can insert or overwrite when typing.
-
- Return value
- Replace : 0,
- Insert : Other than 0.
-
- Related functions
- FweInsert
-
- Example)
-
- enable = FweQueryInsert()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.95. FweQueryMarkLineX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryMarkLineX [index]
-
- Argument(s)
- index Index of mark (1 - 5).
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the marked column number. Default is 1.
-
- Return value
- The registered column position will be returned. 0 will be returned when
- there is no marked position or the argument is invalid.
-
- Related functions
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweMarkPos
- FweQueryMarkLineY
-
- Example)
-
- x = FweQueryMarkLineX( 3 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.96. FweQueryMoveCur ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryMoveCur [direct]
-
- Argument(s)
- direct Specify the direction to move the cursor to. The directions you
- can specify are left, right, top, and bottom.
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the column/line position you can move the cursor to
- in a window without scrolling.
-
- Return value
- The furthest/nearest position that you can move the cursor to will be
- returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBottom
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweRight
- FweTop
- FweTopInScreen
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- y = FweQueryMoveCur( 'bottom' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.97. FweQueryMarkLineY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryMarkLineY [index]
-
- Argument(s)
- index Index of mark (1 - 5). Default is 1.
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the marked line number.
-
- Return value
- The registered line position will be returned. 0 will be returned when
- there is no marked position or the argument is invalid.
-
- Related functions
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweMarkPos
- FweQueryMarkLineX
-
- Example)
-
- y = FweQueryMarkLineY( 3 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.98. FweQueryName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryName
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the filename of the editing file.
-
- Return value
- Return the filename of the editing file.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryDir
- FweSaveAs
-
- Example)
-
- path = FweQueryName()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.99. FweQueryOptions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryOptions tag, item
-
- Argument(s)
- tag Specify the following values.
- Window The contents of the window page of "Environment".
- Cursor The contents of the cursor page of "Environment".
- File The contents of the file page of "Environment".
- Toolbar The contents of the toolbar page of "Environment".
- Other The contents of the other page of "Environment".
- item Refer to the arguments for the values to be specified.
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the contents of the environment you have configured.
-
- Return value
- The information of the specified contents will be returned. -1 will be
- returned when an error occurs.
-
- Related functions
- FweSetOptions
-
- Example)
-
- y = FweQueryOptions( 'Window', 'Number' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.99.1. Arguments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Tag = Window
- LEFTSPACE
- Shows whether the option "Set margin to window-left" is selected. A
- value other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- KEYWORD
- Shows whether the option "Display keywords" is selected. A value other
- than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- RULER
- Shows the setting in the option "Display ruler".
- 1 will be returned when a ruler is displayed on the top of the window.
- 2 will be returned when a ruler is displayed on the bottom of the
- window.
-
- NUMBER
- Shows whether the option "Display line number" is selected. A value
- other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- EOLEOF
- Shows whether the option "Display carriage return character" is
- selected. A value other than 0 will be returned when this option is
- selected.
-
- CONTROL
- Shows whether the option "Display control character" is selected. A
- value other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- TAB
- Shows whether the option "Display TAB character" is selected. A value
- other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- DBCS
- Shows whether the option "Display full-size blank character" is
- selected.
-
- WIDELINE
- Shows the setting in the option "Broaden line spacing".
- 1 will be returned when broadening the line spacing by the size of a
- line.
- 2 will be returned when broadening the line spacing by 1/2 the size of
- a line.
- 3 will be returned when broadening the line spacing by 1/3 the size of
- a line.
- 4 will be returned when broadening the line spacing by 1/4 the size of
- a line.
-
- VSCROLLBAR
- Shows whether the option "Display vertical scroll bar" is selected. A
- value other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- HSCROLLBAR
- Shows whether the option "Display horizontal scroll bar" is selected. A
- value other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- AUTOMARGINS
- Shows whether the option "Word wrap at window size" is selected. A
- value other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- MARGINS
- Shows the column number where a text is wrapped. The specified column
- number will be returned.
-
- MARGINLINE
- Shows whether the option "Display wrap line" is selected. A value other
- than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- PTRINRULER
- Shows the setting in the option "Highlighted column position in ruler".
- The specified column position will be returned.
-
- TABCNT
- Shows the setting in the option "Tab setting". The number of digits for
- a tab that is specified in the option will be returned.
-
- USESPCWITHTAB
- Shows whether the option "Use blank for TAB" is selected. A value other
- than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- SIZEPOS
- Shows the setting in the option "Initial window size".
- 0 will be returned when "Default size" is selected.
- 1 will be returned when "Last window size" is selected.
- 2 will be returned when "Display top-left to right" is specified.
- 3 will be returned when "Display bottom-left to right".
- 4 will be returned when "Display top-right to left".
- 5 will be returned when "Display bottom-right to left".
-
- COLUMNS
- Shows "The number of columns of initial window size". The specified
- number will be returned.
-
- ROWS
- Shows "The number of lines of initial window size". The specified
- number will be returned.
-
- FUNCKEYS
- Shows the setting in the option "Function key". The number of displayed
- function keys (other than 0) will be returned.
-
- SAVEDIR
- Shows whether the option "Save directory when exit" is selected. A
- value other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- UNDO
- Shows whether the option "Limit UNDO" is selected. A value other than 0
- will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- USEMSGBOX
- Shows whether the option "Use message box" is selected. A value other
- than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- PAGE
- Shows the setting in the option "Edit page by page". The number of
- lines for a page will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- PAGELINE
- Shows whether the option "Display page break line" is selected. A value
- other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- COLORTABDBCS
- Shows whether the option "Display TAB character and full-size blank
- character with color" is selected. A value other than 0 will be
- selected when this option is selected.
-
- Tag = Cursor
- FREECURSOR
- Shows the setting in the option "Free cursor mode".
- 1 will be returned when this option is selected.
- 2 will be returned when "Virtual free cursor mode" is selected.
-
- SCROLL
- Shows whether the option "No precedence scroll" is selected. A value
- other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- NONESTOP
- Shows whether the option "Do not move line top <=> line end" is
- selected. A value other than 0 will be returned when this option is
- selected.
-
- KEYREPEAT
- Shows whether the option "Move with key repeat" is selected. A value
- other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- WHENTAGJUMP
- Shows whether the option "Move cursor to one line below when tag jump"
- is selected. A value other than 0 will be returned when this option is
- selected.
-
- INDENT
- Shows whether the option "Auto indent" is selected. A value other than
- 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- INDENTMODE
- Shows the way to indent lines.
- 1 will be returned in a logical OR (an OR operation) when "Use TAB for
- indent" is selected.
- 2 will be returned in a logical OR (an OR operation) when "Indent
- blank" is selected.
-
- TABWITHSTAT
- Shows whether the option "Move tab with typing mode" is selected. A
- value other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- INPUTCOLUMN
- Shows whether the option "Correspond to column when input" is selected.
- A value other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- SAVEPOS
- Shows whether the option "Save cursor position when exit" is selected.
- A value other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- STYLE
- Shows the cursor type.
- 1 will be returned when "Blink" is selected.
- 2 will be returned when "Underline" is selected.
- 4 will be returned when "Color cursor line" is selected.
- 16 will be returned when "Box 1 type" is selected.
- 32 will be returned when "Box 2 type" is selected.
- 64 will be returned when "I type" is selected.
- 128 will be returned when "_ type" is selected.
- Each value will be returned in a logical OR (an OR operation).
-
- WAKEUPSTAT
- Shows the setting in the option "Cursor mode at start up". A value
- other than 0 will be returned when "Insert mode" is selected.
-
- POINTER
- Shows the setting of "Mouse pointer".
- 0 will be returned when "Arrow" is selected.
- 1 will be returned when "Text I type" is selected.
-
- SELFOUND
- Shows the setting in the option "Display search result".
- 0 will be returned when "Reverse-display" is selected.
- 1 will be returned when "Select" is selected.
-
- TURBO
- Shows the setting in the option "Accelerate". The time before
- acceleration (by the millisecond) will be returned when this option is
- selected.
-
- PASTEPOS
- Shows the setting in the option "Insert position when pasting". A value
- other than 0 will be returned when "Above the cursor position" is
- selected.
-
- MOVEAFTERPASTE
- Shows the setting in the option "Cursor position after paste". A value
- other than 0 will be returned when "Move" is selected.
-
- Tag = File
- IGNOREEOF:ehp2.
- Shows whether the option "Ignore EOF when loading" is selected. A value
- other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- AUTODECODE
- Shows whether the option "Automatically identify EUC and JIS when
- loading" is selected. A value other than 0 will be returned when this
- option is selected.
-
- USESLASH
- Shows whether the option "Use / for a path symbol" is selected. A value
- other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- LASTPATH
- Shows the setting in the option "Use the last path in dialog".
- 0 will be returned when "None" is selected.
- 1 will be returned when "Deny overwrite" is selected.
- 2 will be returned when "Deny read and write" is selected.
-
- SHARED
- Shows the setting in the option "Sharing".
- 0 will be returned when "None" is selected.
- 1 will be returned when "Deny overwrite" is selected.
- 2 will be returned when "Deny read and write" is selected.
-
- DIALOG
- Shows the setting in the option "Dialog box".
- 0 will be returned when "FWE standard" is selected.
- 1 will be returned when "OS/2 standard" is selected.
- 2 will be returned when "User-designed" is selected.
-
- AUTOSAVE
- Shows the setting in the option "Autosave". The interval size for each
- saving (by the minute) will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- SAVETOTEMP
- Shows whether the option "Autosave to temporary file" is selected. A
- value other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- MACROPATH
- Shows the setting in the option "Macro file's path". The specified path
- will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- BACKUP
- Shows the setting in the option "Make backup file".
- 1 will be returned when this option is selected to make a backup.
- 2 will be returned when "Do not use the same extensions" is selected.
-
- BACKUPDIR
- Shows the setting in the option "Backup directory". The path that is
- specified for a backup directory will be returned.
-
- STRIPTRAILING
- Shows whether the option "Delete line-tail space" is selected. A value
- other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- DELWHENZERO
- Shows whether the option "Delete size 0 file" is selected. A value
- other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- NOTINCLEOF
- Shows whether the option "Do not save EOF" is selected. A value other
- than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- EOLCODE
- Shows the setting in the option "Line-tail code".
- 0 will be returned when "Default" is selected.
- 1 will be returned when "CR" is selected.
- 2 will be returned when "LF" is selected.
- 3 will be returned when "CR/LF" is selected.
-
- CONVERT
- Shows the setting in the option "Convert".
- 1 will be returned when converting tabs to spaces.
- 2 will be returned when converting spaces to tabs.
-
- Tag = Toolbar
- BALOONHELP
- Shows whether the option "Show balloon help" is selected. A value other
- than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- BIGBUTTON
- Shows whether the option "Show large button" is selected. A value other
- than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- HELPTEXT
- Shows whether the option "Show help text" is selected. A value other
- than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- NEWSTYLE
- Shows whether the option "Show flat button" is selected. A value other
- than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- Tag = Other
- IMONWHENWAKEUP
- Shows whether the option "Turn on Kana-kanji when startup" is selected.
- A value other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- NODEFAULTLINE
- Shows whether the option "Do not process default of cursor line" is
- selected. A value other than 0 will be returned when this option is
- selected.
-
- TARGETISAFTER
- Shows whether the option "Process word after cursor position" is
- selected. A value other than 0 will be returned when this option is
- selected.
-
- WORDWRAP
- Shows whether the option "Word wrap" is selected. A value other than 0
- will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- BURASEGE
- Shows whether the option "CR character burasage" is selected. A value
- other than 0 will be returned when this option is selected.
-
- USEMARK
- Shows the setting in the option "Quotation mark". The specified
- quotation mark will be returned.
-
- POSTIT
- Shows the setting in the option "Post it string". The specified post-it
- string will be returned.
-
- Tag = Execute
- FLUSH
- Applies the settings you have made to windows. "param" is specified
- with 0 when applying the settings only to the current editing window,
- with 1 when applying the settings to all the windows that share the
- same environment, or with 2 when applying the settings to all the
- windows that share the same environment and saving them. When 0 or 1
- is specified, the settings that have been changed by macros will be
- deleted when finishing the macro execution.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.100. FweQueryPosX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryPosX
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about a logical cursor column.
-
- Return value
- Return logical cursor column.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryPosY
- FweQueryX
- FweQueryY
-
- Example)
-
- x = FweQueryPosX()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.101. FweQueryPosY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryPosY
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about a logical cursor line.
-
- Return value
- Return logical cursor line.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryPosX
- FweQueryX
- FweQueryY
-
- Example)
-
- y = FweQueryPosY()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.102. FweQuerySelEndX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQuerySelEndX
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the column number of the last column in the selected
- area.
-
- Return value
- The column position which ends the selected area will be returned.
- -1 will be returned when there is no selected area.
-
- Related functions
- FweQuerySelEndY
- FweQuerySelStartX
- FweQuerySelStartY
- FweQuerySelText
- FweQuerySelTextLen
- FweQuerySelecting
-
- Example)
-
- x = FweQuerySelEndX()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.103. FweQuerySelEndY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQuerySelEndY
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the line number of the last line in the selected
- area.
-
- Return value
- The line position which ends the selected area will be returned.
- -1 will be returned when there is no selected area.
-
- Related functions
- FweQuerySelEndX
- FweQuerySelStartX
- FweQuerySelStartY
- FweQuerySelText
- FweQuerySelTextLen
- FweQuerySelecting
-
- Example)
-
- y = FweQuerySelEndY()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.104. FweQuerySelStartX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQuerySelStartX
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the column number of the first column in the selected
- area.
-
- Return value
- The column position which starts the selected area will be returned.
- -1 will be returned when there is no selected area.
-
- Related functions
- FweQuerySelEndX
- FweQuerySelEndY
- FweQuerySelStartY
- FweQuerySelText
- FweQuerySelTextLen
- FweQuerySelecting
-
- Example)
-
- x = FweQuerySelStartX()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.105. FweQuerySelStartY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQuerySelStartY
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the line number of the first line in the selected
- area.
-
- Return value
- The line position which starts the selected area will be returned.
- -1 will be returned when there is no selected area.
-
- Related functions
- FweQuerySelEndX
- FweQuerySelEndY
- FweQuerySelStartX
- FweQuerySelText
- FweQuerySelTextLen
- FweQuerySelecting
-
- Example)
-
- y = FweQuerySelStartY()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.106. FweQuerySelText ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQuerySelText
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the length of the text in the selected area.
-
- Return value
- The text in the selected area will be returned. The returned text is
- written with the CR code and 0Ah. (0Dh is not included.) 0Ah should be
- added to every line in a selected block. A NULL string will be returned
- when an error occurs.
-
- Related functions
- FweQuerySelTextLen
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSelect
- FweSelectAll
- FweSelectBlock
- FweSelectExpand
- FweSelectLine
- FweSelectWord
-
- Example)
-
- text = FweQuerySelText()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.107. FweQuerySelTextLen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQuerySelTextLen
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the length of the text in the selected area.
-
- Return value
- Return the length of the text in the selected area.
-
- Related functions
- FweQuerySelEndX
- FweQuerySelEndY
- FweQuerySelStartX
- FweQuerySelStartY
- FweQuerySelText
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSelect
- FweSelectAll
- FweSelectBlock
- FweSelectExpand
- FweSelectLine
- FweSelectWord
-
- Example)
-
- len = FweQuerySelTextLen()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.108. FweQuerySelecting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQuerySelecting
-
- Comment
- You can inquire if there is any selected text and its kind.
-
- Return value
- 0 No selected area
- 1 Normal selection
- 2 Word selection
- 3 Line selection
- 4 Block selection
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryInClipBrd
- FweQuerySelEndX
- FweQuerySelEndY
- FweQuerySelStartX
- FweQuerySelStartY
- FweQuerySelText
- FweQuerySelTextLen
- FweSelect
- FweSelectAll
- FweSelectBlock
- FweSelectExpand
- FweSelectLine
- FweSelectWord
-
- Example)
-
- kind = FweQuerySelecting()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.109. FweQueryText ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryText [line]
-
- Argument(s)
- line Specify the number of a target physical line. When no line number is
- specified, the current line will be the target.
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the length of the text at the cursor position.
-
- Return value
- The returned text has contents of physical lines and includes 0Ah or 1Ah in
- the end. (0Dh is not included.) A NULL string will be returned when an
- error occurs or the specified line number does not exist.
-
- Related functions
- FweInput
- FweQueryChar
- FweQueryCharType
- FweQuerySelText
- FweQuerySelTextLen
- FweQueryTextLength
-
- Example)
-
- text= FweQueryText()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.110. FweQueryTextLength ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryTextLength [option [line]]
-
- Argument(s)
- option Specify the following values.
- 0 Changes TAB characters to blank characters.(Default)
- 1 Does not change TAB characters.
-
- line Specify the number of a target physical line. When no line number
- is specified, the current line will be the target.
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the length of the text at the cursor position.
-
- Return value
- Return the length of the text at the cursor position.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryChar
- FweQueryCharType
- FweQuerySelText
- FweQuerySelTextLen
- FweQueryText
-
- Example)
-
- len = FweQueryTextLength( 1 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.111. FweQueryTopNo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryTopNo
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the line number of the top line that is displayed in
- a window.
-
- Return value
- Return the line number of the top line that is displayed in a window.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryBottomNo
- FweQueryWinLines
- FweSetTopNo
- FweSetWinSize
-
- Example)
-
- no = FweQueryTopNo()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.112. FweQueryUndo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryUndo [kind]
-
- Argument(s)
- kind Specify the following values.
- 0 Undo (Default)
- 1 Redo
- 2 Undo line
-
- Comment
- You can inquire if you can undo, redo, and undo a line.
-
- Return value
- 0 will be returned when you can undo a process. A value other than 0 will
- be returned when you cannot undo a process.
-
- Related functions
- FweRedo
- FweUndo
- FweUndoAll
- FweUndoLine
-
- Example)
-
- enable = FweQueryUndo()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.113. FweQueryWindowFromName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryWindowFromName file
-
- Argument(s)
- file Specify a pathname you want to inspect.
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the edit mode of a specified file.
-
- Return value
- The following values will be returned when the specified file is opened.
- The first byte : Shows whether the file exists in the window in
- which the search was executed.
- The second byte : Shows whether the file exists in the ring.
- The third byte : Shows whether the file is editable.
- The fourth byte : Shows whether the file has been changed.
- The fifth byte and later: Shows the ID of the editing window.
-
- *The first - the fourth bytes : True=1, False=0
-
- 0 will be returned when the specified file is not opened.
-
- Related functions
- FweChangeWindow
- FweSetFocus
- FweWinNextInRing
-
- Example)
-
- szFile = 'D:\CONFIG.SYS';
- rcInfo = FweQueryWindowFromName( szFile );
-
- if length(rcInfo) > 4 then do
- if SubStr(rcInfo,1,1) = '0' then do
- rc = FweChangeWindow( "", SubStr( rcInfo, 5 ) );
-
- if SubStr(rcInfo,2,1) = '1' then do
- say 'I can not change ring!!';
- end;
- end;
- else do
- if SubStr(rcInfo,2,1) = '1' then do
- rc = FweWinNextInRing( szFile );
- end;
- end;
- end;
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.114. FweQueryWinHeight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryWinHeight
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the height of a window.
-
- Return value
- Return the height of a window.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryWinWidth
- FweSetFocus
- FweSetWinSize
-
- Example)
-
- cy = FweQueryWinHeight()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.115. FweQueryWinLines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryWinLines
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the number of lines that are displayed in a window.
-
- Return value
- Return the number of lines that are displayed in a window.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryBottomNo
- FweQueryTopNo
- FweSetWinSize
-
- Example)
-
- cnt = FweQueryWinLines()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.116. FweQueryWinPosX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryWinPosX
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the X position of a window.
-
- Return value
- Return the X position of a window.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryWinPosY
- FweSetWinPos
-
- Example)
-
- x = FweQueryWinPosX
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.117. FweQueryWinPosY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryWinPosY
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the Y position of a window.
-
- Return value
- Return the Y position of a window.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryWinPosX
- FweSetWinPos
-
- Example)
-
- y = FweQueryWinPosY
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.118. FweQueryWinWidth ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryWinWidth
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about the width of a window.
-
- Return value
- Return the width of a window.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryWinHeight
- FweSetFocus
- FweSetWinSize
-
- Example)
-
- cx = FweQueryWinWidth()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.119. FweQueryX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryX
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about a physical cursor column.
-
- Return value
- Return physical cursor column.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryPosX
- FweQueryPosY
- FweQueryY
-
- Example)
-
- x = FweQueryX()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.120. FweQueryY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweQueryY
-
- Comment
- You can inquire about a physical cursor line.
-
- Return value
- Return physical cursor line.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryPosX
- FweQueryPosY
- FweQueryX
-
- Example)
-
- y = FweQueryY()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.121. FweRedo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweRedo
-
- Comment
- Redoes the change that has been undone previously.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweInput
- FweQueryUndo
- FweUndo
- FweUndoAll
- FweUndoLine
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweRedo()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.122. FweReload ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweReload
-
- Comment
- Reopens the current file. You can use this function when you edit the FWE
- file in another program.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAllSave
- FweNew
- FweOpen
- FweSaveAs
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweReload()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.123. FweReplace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweReplace source, dest, option, direction
-
- Argument(s)
- source Specify a search string (a replaced original string).
- dest Specify a string you want to replace with.
- option Specify the following values in a logical OR (an OR operation).
- 1 Ignores uppercase/lowercase.
- 2 Searches for a word.
- 4 Uses regular expression.
- 8 Searches only in the selected area.
- 16 Searches in the whole document.
- 32 Ignores SBCS/DBCS characters. (Japanese only)
- direction Specify 1 to replace the part after the cursor position.
-
- Comment
- You can replace a character string. When no argument is specified, a
- replace dialog box will be displayed.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an cancel in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweFind
- FweFindNext
- FweFindPrev
- FweFindGrep
- FweJump
- FweJumpMarkPos
- FweLastPos
- FweMarkPos
- FwePostitList
- FwePostitNext
- FwePostitPrev
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweReplace( 'EPM', 'FWE' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.124. FweReturn ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweReturn [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of return
-
- Comment
- Inserts a new line under the cursor position and moves the cursor to the
- line.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweInput
- FweInputReturn
- FweInputTab
- FweInsertLineBelow
- FweInsertLineUp
- FweInsertNewLine
- FweQueryEditMode
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweReturn()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.125. FweRight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweRight [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of columns
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor one column right.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBackTab
- FweBottom
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FweNextWord
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FwePrevWord
- FweInput
- FweTab
- FweTop
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweRight()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.126. FweSave ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSave
-
- Comment
- Saves the editing file under the same field.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAllSave
- FweNew
- FweOpen
- FweQueryCode
- FweReload
- FweSaveAs
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSave()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.127. FweSaveAs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweAllSave [file]
-
- Argument(s)
- file New filename
-
- Comment
- Saves the editing file and gives it a new filename.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAllSave
- FweNew
- FweOpen
- FweQueryCode
- FweReload
- FweSave
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSaveAs( 'Readme.Txt' )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.128. FweSelect ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSelect
-
- Comment
- Starts selecting a text.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweCopy
- FweCut
- FweFill
- FwePaste
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSelectAll
- FweSelectBlock
- FweSelectCancel
- FweSelectExpand
- FweSelectLine
- FweSelectWord
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSelect()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.129. FweSelectAll ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSelectAll
-
- Comment
- Selects all the contents of the editing file.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweCopy
- FweCut
- FweFill
- FwePaste
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSelect
- FweSelectBlock
- FweSelectCancel
- FweSelectExpand
- FweSelectLine
- FweSelectWord
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSelectAll()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.130. FweSelectBlock ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSelectBlock
-
- Comment
- Starts selecting a block. When a block select has already started, this
- function cancels the selection.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweCopy
- FweCut
- FweFill
- FwePaste
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSelectAll
- FweSelectCancel
- FweSelectExpand
- FweSelectLine
- FweSelectWord
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSelectBlock()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.131. FweSelectCancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSelectCancel
-
- Comment
- Cancels the select process that has started.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweSelect
- FweSelectAll
- FweSelectBlock
- FweSelectExpand
- FweSelectLine
- FweSelectWord
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSelectCancel()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.132. FweSelectExpand ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSelectExpand
-
- Comment
- Starts an expanded select. With an expanded select, the select mode
- switches over (line select/normal select) according to the cursor movement
- (vertical/horizontal).
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweCopy
- FweCut
- FweFill
- FwePaste
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSelectAll
- FweSelectBlock
- FweSelectCancel
- FweSelectLine
- FweSelectWord
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSelectExpand()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.133. FweSelectLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSelectLine
-
- Comment
- Starts selecting a line. When a line select has already started, this
- function cancels the selection.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweCopy
- FweCut
- FweFill
- FwePaste
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSelectAll
- FweSelectBlock
- FweSelectCancel
- FweSelectExpand
- FweSelectWord
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSelectLine()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.134. FweSelectWord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSelectWord
-
- Comment
- Selects a word at the cursor position.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweCopy
- FweCut
- FweFill
- FwePaste
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSelectAll
- FweSelectBlock
- FweSelectCancel
- FweSelectExpand
- FweSelectLine
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSelectWord()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.135. FweSetCode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSetCode [kind] [[EOL] [[EOF]]]
-
- Argument(s)
- kind Specify the following values.
- -1 No change
- 0 Shift JIS code
- 1 EUC code
- 2 JIS code
-
- EOL Specify the following values.
- -1 No change
- 0 Default
- 1 CR/LF
- 2 CR
- 3 LF
-
- EOF Specify the following values.
- -1 No change
- 0 EOF included
- 1 EOF not included
-
- Comment
- You can specify the text code to be used when saving a file. JIS code will
- be specified when no argument is specified.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAllSave
- FweQueryCode
- FweSave
- FweSaveAs
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSetCode( 1 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.136. FweSetFocus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSetFocus
-
- Comment
- Set focus to window.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweChangeWindow
- FweSetWinPos
- FweSetWinSize
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSetFocus()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.137. FweSetInClipBrd ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSetInClipBrd kind
-
- Argument(s)
- kind Specify the following values.
- 1 Normal selection
- 2 Line selection
- 3 Block selection
-
- Comment
- You can change the setting to paste the text in the clipboard. When you
- change the text that is selected as a normal selection/a line selection to
- the one that is selected as a block selection (or a block selection to a
- normal/line selection), a part of the pasted text will be different from
- the original text.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweQueryInClipBrd
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSetInClipBrd( 2 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.138. FweSetOptions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSetOptions tag, item, parameter
-
- Argument(s)
- tag Specify the following values.
- Window The contents of the window page of "Environment".
- Cursor The contents of the cursor page of "Environment".
- File The contents of the file page of "Environment".
- Toolbar The contents of the toolbar page of "Environment".
- Other The contents of the other page of "Environment".
- Execute Apply the changed options.
- item, parameterRefer to the arguments for the values to be specified.
-
- Comment
- Set the option.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryOptions
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSetOptions( 'Window', 'HScrollBar', 1 )
- rc = FweSetOptions( 'Execute', 'Flush', 0 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.139. FweSetTopNo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSetTopNo no
-
- Argument(s)
- no Specify the line number that is to be displayed at the top of the
- window.
-
- Comment
- You can set the specified line to be the top line of the window. The
- cursor will move to the top line in the window.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- -1 : will be returned when you cannot set the specified line to be the top
- line of the window.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryBottomNo
- FweQueryTopNo
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSetTopNo( 100 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.140. FweSetWinPos ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSetWinPos x [, y]
-
- Argument(s)
- x Column position in window
- y Line position in window
-
- Comment
- Move cursor to specified position.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryWinPosX
- FweQueryWinPosY
- FweSetFocus
- FweSetWinSize
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSetWinPos( 100, 200 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.141. FweSetWinSize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSetWinSize cx [, cy]
-
- Argument(s)
- cx Window width
- cy Window Height
-
- Comment
- Change window size to specified width and height.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryWinHeight
- FweQueryWinLines
- FweQueryWinWidth
- FweSetFocus
- FweSetWinPos
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSetWinSize( 300, 200 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.142. FweSplitLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSplitLine
-
- Comment
- Inserts a CR character at the cursor position and splits the line. The
- characters after the cursor position are pushed to the next line. This
- works as Input CR character at cursor position, but this doesn't indent the
- line.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweDupLine
- FweInputReturn
- FweInsertLineBelow
- FweInsertLineUp
- FweInsertNewLine
- FweJoinLine
- FweReturn
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSplitLine()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.143. FweSwitchEditMode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweSwitchEditMode [mode]
-
- Argument(s)
- mode Specify the following values.
- 0 Editable
- 1 Not-editable
-
- Comment
- You can specified the edit mode. When no mode is specified, the current
- edit mode will be reversed.
-
- Return value
- The mode after being changed (same as the argument) will be returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweQueryEditMode
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweSwitchEditMode( 1 )
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.144. FweTab ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweTab [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of tab
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the right by the tab size that is specified in the
- Window page of Environment. Select [Input tab character] in the Insert
- page to input a tab character.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBackTab
- FweBottom
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FweRight
- FweInputTab
- FweTop
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweTab()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.145. FweToLower ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweToLower
-
- Comment
- Converts uppercase characters in the selected text of the file to lowercase
- characters. When no text is selected, the word that contains the cursor
- position is converted. (The default can be changed to a command so that
- only the part of the word after the cursor position is converted. - in the
- Other page of Environment.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweChangeCase
- FweChangeCaseWord
- FweToUpper
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweToLower()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.146. FweToUpper ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweToUpper
-
- Comment
- Converts lowercase characters in the selected text of the file to uppercase
- characters. When no text is selected, the word that contains the cursor
- position is converted. (The default can be changed to a command so that
- only the part of the word after the cursor position is converted. - in the
- Other page of Environment.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweChangeCase
- FweChangeCaseWord
- FweToLower
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweToUpper()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.147. FweTop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweTop
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the top of a file.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBottom
- FweBottomInScreen
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FweRight
- FweTopInScreen
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweTop()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.148. FweTopInScreen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweTopInScreen
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor to the top line that is shown in the current screen.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBottom
- FweBottomInScreen
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweRight
- FweTop
- FweUp
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweTopInScreen()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.149. FweUndo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweUndo
-
- Comment
- Undoes the previous editing change.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweInput
- FweQueryUndo
- FweRedo
- FweUndoAll
- FweUndoLine
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweUndo()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.150. FweUndoAll ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweUndoAll
-
- Comment
- Undoes all the changes you have made and goes back to the original file.
- You cannot redo this edit.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweInput
- FweQueryUndo
- FweRedo
- FweUndo
- FweUndoLine
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweUndoAll()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.151. FweUndoLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweUndoLine
-
- Comment
- Undoes all the editing changes that have been made to the line that
- contains the cursor position. If the cursor moves out of the editing line,
- this undo command cannot be used.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweInput
- FweQueryUndo
- FweRedo
- FweUndo
- FweUndoAll
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweUndoLine()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.152. FweUp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweUp [count]
-
- Argument(s)
- count Count of lines
-
- Comment
- Moves the cursor one line up.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweBackTab
- FweBottom
- FweDown
- FweLeft
- FweLocLineEnd
- FweLocLineTop
- FwePhyLineEnd
- FwePhyLineTop
- FweQueryMoveCur
- FweRight
- FweInput
- FweTab
- FweTop
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweUp()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.153. FweUseMarkCopy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweUseMarkCopy
-
- Comment
- Copies the selected text to the clipboard, embedding a quotation mark on
- top of each line. Normal/line/block are copied to the clipboard in the
- same way. You can customize the quotation mark in the Other page of
- Environment. When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor
- position is copied to the clipboard. (This default command can be turned
- off in the Other page of Environment.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddCopy
- FweAddCut
- FweCopy
- FweCut
- FweInsertUseMark
- FwePaste
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSetOptions
- FweUseMarkPaste
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweUseMarkCopy()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.154. FweUseMarkCopyToStack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweUseMarkCopyToStack
-
- Comment
- Copies the selected text to the stack, embedding a quotation mark on top of
- each line. Normal/line/block are copied to the stack in the same way.
- When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is
- copied to the stack. (This default command can be turned off in the Other
- page of Environment.)
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweClearStack
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCutToStack
- FwePasteFromDelStack
- FwePasteFromStack
- FwePasteFromStackPop
- FwePopFromStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweUseMarkCopyToStack()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.155. FweUseMarkPaste ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweUseMarkPaste
-
- Comment
- Pastes the contents of the text that is stored in the clipboard at the
- cursor position of the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each
- line. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block). You can customize the quotation mark in the Other
- page of Environment.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddCopy
- FweAddCut
- FweCopy
- FweCut
- FweInsertUseMark
- FwePaste
- FweQuerySelecting
- FweSetOptions
- FweUseMarkCopy
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweUseMarkPaste()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.156. FweUseMarkPasteFromStack ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStack
-
- Comment
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position of
- the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each line. The contents are
- pasted according to the selected text (normal/line/block).
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweClearStack
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCutToStack
- FwePasteFromDelStack
- FwePasteFromStack
- FwePasteFromStackPop
- FwePopFromStack
- FweUseMarkCopyToStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweUseMarkPasteFromStack()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.157. FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop
-
- Comment
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position of
- the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each line. The contents are
- pasted according to the selected text (normal/line/block). The contents
- are deleted from the stack after being pasted.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweClearStack
- FweCopyToFindStack
- FweCopyToStack
- FweCutToStack
- FwePasteFromDelStack
- FwePasteFromStack
- FwePasteFromStackPop
- FwePopFromStack
- FweUseMarkCopyToStack
- FweUseMarkPasteFromStack
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.158. FweWinCascade ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweWinCascade
-
- Comment
- Cascades the windows based on the value which is set in the Window page of
- Environment.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweWinIcon
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweWinCascade()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.159. FweWinIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweWinIcon
-
- Comment
- Minimizes all the active windows to icons.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweWinCascade
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweWinIcon()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1.160. FweWinNextInRing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax
- FweWinNextInRing [file]
-
- Argument(s)
- file Specify the pathname of the editing file you want to switch to in the
- ring.
-
- Comment
- You can switch the editing files in the ring. When no file pathname is
- specified in the argument "file", you can switch one file to the next in
- the ring. This function can be used only in the window where the macro was
- executed.
-
- Return value
- Normal termination:0,
- When an error occurs in the process, the value of -1 is returned.
-
- Related functions
- FweAddRing
- FweQueryWindowFromName
- FweChangeWindow
-
- Example)
-
- rc = FweWinNextInRing()
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.2. Cursor movement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The functions that control the cursor movement are listed in this page. You
- can see the functions and their movements in the following: (The words in the
- parentheses next to the names of the movements are the function names.)
-
- Cursor up (FweUp)
- Moves the cursor one line up.
-
- Cursor down (FweDown)
- Moves the cursor one line down.
-
- Cursor left (FweLeft)
- Moves the cursor one column left.
-
- Cursor right (FweRight)
- Moves the cursor one column right.
-
- Tab (FweTab)
- Moves the cursor to the right by the tab size that is specified in the
- Window page of Environment. Select [Input tab character] in the Insert
- page to input a tab character.
-
- Back tab (FweBackTab)
- Moves the cursor to the left by the tab size that is specified in the
- Window page of Environment.
-
- Move to top of logical line (FweLocLineTop)
- Moves the cursor to the first column of a logical line.
-
- Move to end of logical line (FweLocLineEnd)
- Moves the cursor to the last column of a logical line.
-
- Move to top of physical line (FwePhyLineTop)
- Moves the cursor to the first column of a physical line.
-
- Move to end of physical line (FwePhyLineEnd)
- Moves the cursor to the last column of a physical line.
-
- Move to top of file (FweTop)
- Moves the cursor to the top of a file.
-
- Move to bottom of file (FweBottom)
- Moves the cursor to the bottom of a file.
-
- Move to top of screen (FweTopInScreen)
- Moves the cursor to the top line that is shown in the current screen.
-
- Move to bottom of screen (FweBottomInScreen)
- Moves the cursor to the bottom line that is shown in the current screen.
-
- Move half-page up (FweHarfPageUp)
- Moves the cursor up to the previous page by one-half of the window.
-
- Move half-page down (FweHarfPageDown)
- Moves the cursor down to the next page by one-half of the window.
-
- Move half-page left (FweHarfPageLeft)
- Moves the cursor to the left by one-half of the window.
-
- Move half-page right (FweHarfPageRight)
- Moves the cursor to the right by one-half of the window.
-
- Move one page up (FwePageUp)
- Moves the cursor up to the previous page by the full window size.
-
- Move one page down (FwePageDown)
- Moves the cursor down to the next page by the full window size.
-
- Move one page left (FwePageLeft)
- Moves the cursor to the left by the full window size.
-
- Move one page right (FwePageRight)
- Moves the cursor to the right by the full window size.
-
- Scroll a line up (FweLineUp)
- Scrolls a line up.
-
- Scroll a line down (FweLineDown)
- Scrolls a line down.
-
- Scroll a column left (FweColumnLeft)
- Scrolls a column to the left.
-
- Scroll a column right (FweColumnRight)
- Scrolls a column to the right.
-
- Previous word (FwePrevWord)
- Moves the cursor to the previous word. Refer to Identify word to see how
- to move the cursor.
-
- Next word (FweNextWord)
- Moves the cursor to the next word. Refer to Identify word to see how to
- move the cursor.
-
- Move to last position of edit (FweLastPos)
- Moves the cursor to the last position of the editing.
-
- Mark cursor position (FweMarkPos)
- Marks the current cursor position.
-
- Jump to mark position (FweJumpMarkPos)
- Jumps to the marked cursor position.
-
- Find (FweFind)
- Displays a find dialog box. Specify a search string to start the search.
-
- Find previous (FweFindPrev)
- Searches in the text before the cursor position. When no search string is
- specified, a find dialog box is displayed.
-
- Find next (FweFindNext)
- Searches in the text after the cursor position. When no search string is
- specified, a find dialog box is displayed.
-
- Replace (FweReplace)
- Displays a replace dialog box. Specify a replace string to start the
- replacement.
-
- Jump to specified line (FweJump)
- Moves the cursor to the line that is specified by putting the line number
- in the dialog box. When "Edit by page" is selected in the Window page of
- Environment, the cursor jumps to the specified line of the page that
- contains the cursor position. The line numbers are counted according to
- the setting for the line number in the Window page of Environment.
-
- Post it list (FwePostitList)
- Lists all the lines starting with Post it string that is specified in the
- Other page of Environment. (Also refer to Post it in the functions list.)
-
- Jump to previous post it (FwePostitPrev)
- Moves the cursor to the Post it string that is positioned before the cursor
- position. The "Post it string" is specified in the Other page of
- Environment. (Also refer to Post it in the functions list.)
-
- Jump to next post it (FwePostitNext)
- Moves the cursor to the Post it string that is positioned after the cursor
- position. The "Post it string" is specified in the Other page of
- Environment. (Also refer to Post it in the functions list.)
-
- Jump to parentheses (FweJumpPare)
- Moves the cursor to the parentheses (a character string) that are
- corresponding to the parentheses (a character string) of the cursor
- position. The parentheses (a character string) need to be specified in the
- Expansion page of Keywords.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3. Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The functions that control the delete are listed in this page. You can see
- the functions and their movements in the following: (The words in the
- parentheses next to the names of the movements are the function names.)
-
- Delete (FweDelete)
- Deletes a character at the cursor position.
-
- Backspace (FweBackSpace)
- Deletes a character to the left of the cursor position.
-
- Delete line (FweDeleteLine)
- Deletes a logical line at the cursor position.
-
- Join lines (FweJoinLine)
- Joins the physical line at the cursor position with the next physical line.
- This function works the same way as deleting the CR character at the end of
- the cursor line.
-
- Delete before cursor (FweDeleteBefore)
- Deletes all the characters before the cursor position in the cursor line.
-
- Delete after cursor (FweDeleteAfter)
- Deletes all the characters after the cursor position in the cursor line.
-
- Delete word (FweDeleteWord)
- Deletes the word at the cursor position. Refer to Identify word to see how
- to identify the word to be deleted.
-
- Delete word before cursor (FweDeleteWordBefore)
- Deletes the word at the cursor position only from the top of the word to
- the character before the cursor position. Refer to Identify word to see
- how to identify the word to be deleted.
-
- Delete word after cursor (FweDeleteWordAfter)
- Deletes the word at the cursor position only from the cursor position to
- the end of the word. Refer to Identify word to see how to identify the
- word to be deleted.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.4. Insert ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The functions that control the insert are listed in this page. You can see
- the functions and their movements in the following: (The words in the
- parentheses next to the names of the movements are the function names.)
-
- Input CR character at cursor position (FweInputReturn)
- Inputs a carriage return character at the cursor position and moves the
- cursor to the next line. The characters after the cursor position are
- pushed to the next line (to the cursor line after the execution.)
-
- Return (FweReturn)
- Inserts a new line under the cursor position and moves the cursor to the
- line.
-
- Return above cursor line (FweInsertNewLine)
- You can insert a new line above the cursor line with an indent according to
- the indent of the cursor line, and move the cursor to the inserted line.
-
- Return above cursor line (FweInsertLineUp)
- Inserts a new line above the cursor line with an indent according to the
- indent of the cursor line, and moves the cursor to the inserted line.
-
- Insert line above cursor line (FweInsertLineBelow)
- Inserts a new line under the cursor line. The cursor stays in the same
- position.
-
- Duplicate line (FweDupLine)
- Inserts a logical line with the same contents as those of the cursor line
- under the cursor line. When a text is selected, a new line with the same
- contents as those of the selected text is inserted under the selected text.
-
- Split line at cursor position (FweSelectLine)
- Inserts a CR character at the cursor position and splits the line. The
- characters after the cursor position are pushed to the next line. This
- works as Input CR character at cursor position, but this doesn't indent the
- line.
-
- Toggle typing mode insert/overwrite (FweInsert)
- Toggles the typing mode (insert/overwrite).
-
- Input tab character (FweInputTab)
- Inputs a tab character at the cursor position. Select Tab in the Cursor
- page to move the cursor by the tab size.
-
- Input string(s) (FweInput)
- Inputs a string(s) at the cursor position.
-
- Insert quotation mark (FweInsertUseMark)
- Inserts a quotation mark at the top of the cursor line. When a text is
- selected, this function works on the selected text.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5. Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The functions that control the edit are listed in this page. You can see the
- functions and their movements in the following: (The words in the parentheses
- next to the names of the movements are the function names.)
-
- Start select (FweSelect)
- Starts selecting a text.
-
- Start expanded select (FweSelectExpand)
- Starts an expanded select. With an expanded select, the select mode
- switches over (line select/normal select) according to the cursor movement
- (vertical/horizontal).
-
- Start line select (FweSelectLine)
- Starts selecting a line. When a line select has already started, this
- function cancels the selection.
-
- Start block select (FweSelectBlock)
- Starts selecting a block. When a block select has already started, this
- function cancels the selection.
-
- Select word (FweSelectWord)
- Selects a word at the cursor position.
-
- Select All (FweSelectAll)
- Selects all the contents of the editing file.
-
- Cancel select (FweSelectCancel)
- Cancels the select process that has started.
-
- Paste (FwePaste)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the clipboard at the cursor
- position. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block).
-
- Copy (FweCopy)
- Copies the selected text to the clipboard. Normal/line/block are copied to
- the clipboard in the same way. When no text is selected, the line that
- contains the cursor position is copied to the clipboard. (This default
- command can be turned off in the Other page of Environment.)
-
- Cut (FweCut)
- Cuts the selected text to the clipboard. The text will be deleted from the
- editing file. Normal/line/block are cut to the clipboard in the same way.
- When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is cut
- to the clipboard. (This default command can be turned off in the Other
- page of Environment.)
-
- Copy for append (FweAddCopy)
- Copies the selected text and appends it to the end of the clipboard. When
- a block is selected, it is copied to the clipboard replacing any existing
- clipboard contents. When no text is selected, the line that contains the
- cursor position is copied to the clipboard. (This default command can be
- turned off in the Other page of Environment.)
-
- Cut for append (FweAddCut)
- Cuts the selected text and appends it to the end of the clipboard. The
- text will be deleted from the editing file. When a block is selected, it
- is cut to the clipboard replacing any existing clipboard contents. When no
- text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is cut to the
- clipboard. (This default command can be turned off in the Other page of
- Environment.)
-
- Paste with quotation mark (FweUseMarkCopy)
- Pastes the contents of the text that is stored in the clipboard at the
- cursor position of the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each
- line. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block). You can customize the quotation mark in the Other
- page of Environment.
-
- Copy with quotation mark (FweUseMarkPaste)
- Copies the selected text to the clipboard, embedding a quotation mark on
- top of each line. Normal/line/block are copied to the clipboard in the
- same way. You can customize the quotation mark in the Other page of
- Environment. When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor
- position is copied to the clipboard. (This default command can be turned
- off in the Other page of Environment.)
-
- Paste from stack (FwePasteFromStack)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position of
- the file. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block).
-
- Delete from stack after paste (FwePasteFromStackPop)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position of
- the file. The contents are pasted according to the selected text
- (normal/line/block). The contents are deleted from the stack after being
- pasted.
-
- Paste from delete stack (FwePasteFromDelStackPop)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the delete string stack at the
- cursor position.
-
- Copy to stack (FweCopyToStack)
- Copies the selected text to the stack. Normal/line/block are copied to the
- stack in the same way. When no text is selected, the line that contains
- the cursor position is copied to the stack. (This default command can be
- turned off in the Other page of Environment.)
-
- Cut to stack (FweCutToStack)
- Cuts the selected text to the stack. The text will be deleted from the
- editing file. Normal/line/block are cut to the stack in the same way.
- When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is cut
- to the stack. (This default command can be turned off in the Other page of
- Environment.)
-
- Paste from stack with quotation mark (FweUseMarkPasteFromStack)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position of
- the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each line. The contents are
- pasted according to the selected text (normal/line/block).
-
- Delete from stack after paste with quotation mark
- (FweUseMarkPasteFromStackPop)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the stack at the cursor position of
- the file, embedding a quotation mark on top of each line. The contents are
- pasted according to the selected text (normal/line/block). The contents
- are deleted from the stack after being pasted.
-
- Copy to stack with quotation mark (FweUseMarkCopyToStack)
- Copies the selected text to the stack, embedding a quotation mark on top of
- each line. Normal/line/block are copied to the stack in the same way.
- When no text is selected, the line that contains the cursor position is
- copied to the stack. (This default command can be turned off in the Other
- page of Environment.)
-
- Delete top of stack (FwePopFromStack)
- Deletes the first item of the stack (the item that is used when pasting).
-
- Delete all item in stack (FweClearStack)
- Deletes all the items in the stack.
-
- Copy to search string stack (FweCopyToFindStack)
- Copies the selected text to the search string stack.
-
- Expand word copy (FweExpandWordCopy)
- At first, the word after the cursor position is copied to the search string
- stack. Then the next words are copied and added to the search string stack
- successively.
-
- Expand word paste (FweExpandWordPaste)
- Pastes the contents that are stored in the search string stack at the
- cursor position of the file.
-
- Undo (FweUndo)
- Undoes the previous editing change.
-
- Undo line (FweUndoLine)
- Undoes all the editing changes that have been made to the line that
- contains the cursor position. If the cursor moves out of the editing line,
- this undo command cannot be used.
-
- Undo all (FweUndoAll)
- Undoes all the changes you have made and goes back to the original file.
- You cannot redo this edit.
-
- Redo (FweRedo)
- Redoes the change that has been undone previously.
-
- Convert to lower case (FweToLower)
- Converts uppercase characters in the selected text of the file to lowercase
- characters. When no text is selected, the word that contains the cursor
- position is converted. (The default can be changed to a command so that
- only the part of the word after the cursor position is converted. - in the
- Other page of Environment.)
-
- Convert to upper case (FweToUpper)
- Converts lowercase characters in the selected text of the file to uppercase
- characters. When no text is selected, the word that contains the cursor
- position is converted. (The default can be changed to a command so that
- only the part of the word after the cursor position is converted. - in the
- Other page of Environment.)
-
- Convert cursor character uppercase<=>lowercase (FweChangeCase)
- Converts the character at the cursor position to the uppercase/lowercase
- character and moves the cursor to the right by one character. When a text
- is selected, alphabetical characters in the selected text are converted to
- the uppercase/lowercase, and the cursor doesn't move.
-
- Convert word uppercase<=>lowercase (FweChangeCaseWord)
- Converts the first alphabetical character in the selected text to the
- uppercase/lowercase character and accords all the letters of the word at
- the cursor position to the case character you converted the first character
- to. (The default can be changed to a command so that only the part of the
- word after the cursor position is converted. - in the Other page of
- Environment.)
-
- Fill selected text with specified character (FweFill)
- Fills the selected text with copies of the specified character.
-
- Edit new file (FweNew)
- Creates a new file to edit.
-
- Open file (FweOpen)
- Open a file to edit.
-
- Import file at cursor position (FweImport)
- Imports a file at the cursor position and adds it to the current editing
- file.
-
- Reload editing file (FweReload)
- Reloads the editing file.
-
- Close and open (FweCloseOpen)
- Closes the editing file and opens a new file in the same window.
-
- Add to ring (FweAddRing)
- Adds a file to the ring.
-
- Save (FweSave)
- Saves the editing file under the same field.
-
- Save as (FweSaveAs)
- Saves the editing file and gives it a new filename.
-
- Force to save (FweForceSave)
- Forces FWE to save the editing file.
-
- Save all (FweAllSave)
- Saves all the editing files under the same fields.
-
- Print (FwePrint)
- Prints the editing text.
-
- Set character code (FweSetCode)
- Specifies a character code for the current editing file when it is saved.
- In most cases, the character code for the opened file is used when it is
- saved. SHIFT JIS is used for new files. If EUS or JIS Auto Select cannot
- read a text, you can still specify another character code to open the text.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.6. Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The functions that control the window are listed in this page. You can see
- the functions and their movements in the following: (The words in the
- parentheses next to the names of the movements are the function names.)
-
- Change ring (FweWinNextInRing)
- Changes the window to the window of the next file in the ring.
-
- Cascade (FweWinCascade)
- Cascades the windows based on the value which is set in the Window page of
- Environment.
-
- Icon all (FweWinIcon)
- Minimizes all the active windows to icons.
-
- Edit mode (FweSwitchEditMode)
- Turns on/off the edit mode.
-
- Set window size (FweSetWinSize)
- You can specify the window size.
-
- Set window position (FweSetWinPos)
- You can specify the window position.
-
- Set environment (FweSetOptions)
- You can specify the environment.
-
- Switch windows (FweChangeWindow)
- You can switch the windows that are operated with macros.
-
- Set focus (FweSetFocus)
- You can set a focus on a window that is being operated with a macro.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.7. Inquiry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The functions that control the inquiry are listed in this page. You can see
- the functions and their movements in the following: (The words in the
- parentheses next to the names of the movements are the function names.)
-
- Inquire about physical cursor line (FweQueryY)
- You can inquire about a physical cursor line.
-
- Inquire about physical cursor column (FweQueryX)
- You can inquire about a physical cursor column.
-
- Inquire about logical cursor line (FweQueryPosY)
- You can inquire about a logical cursor line.
-
- Inquire about logical cursor column (FweQueryPosX)
- You can inquire about a logical cursor column.
-
- Inquire about lines in window (FweQueryWinLines)
- You can inquire about the number of lines that are displayed in a window.
-
- Inquire about top line number in window (FweQueryTopNo)
- You can inquire about the line number of the top line that is displayed in
- a window.
-
- Inquire about bottom line number in window (FweQueryBottomNo)
- You can inquire about the line number of the bottom line that is displayed
- in a window.
-
- Inquire about area you can move without scroll (FweQueryMoveCur)
- You can inquire about the column/line position you can move the cursor to
- in a window without scrolling.
-
- Inquire about character at cursor position (FweQueryChar)
- You can inquire about the character at the cursor position.
-
- Inquire about character type at cursor position (FweQueryCharType)
- You can inquire about the character type at the cursor position.
-
- Inquire about text at cursor position (FweQueryText)
- You can inquire about the text at the cursor position.
-
- Inquire about text length at cursor position (FweQueryTextLength)
- You can inquire about the length of the text at the cursor position.
-
- Inquire about text in selected area (FweQuerySelText)
- You can inquire about the text in the selected area.
-
- Inquire about text length in selected area (FweQuerySelTextLen)
- You can inquire about the length of the text in the selected area.
-
- Inquire about path of editing file (FweQueryDir)
- You can inquire about the path of the editing file.
-
- Inquire about name of editing file (FweQueryName)
- You can inquire about the filename of the editing file.
-
- Inquire about undo/redo (FweQueryUndo)
- You can inquire if you can undo, redo, and undo a line.
-
- Inquire about edit mode (FweQueryEditMode)
- You can inquire if you can edit or not.
-
- Inquire about insert/overwrite (FweQueryInsert)
- You can inquire if you can insert or overwrite when typing.
-
- Inquire about window height (FweQueryWinHeight)
- You can inquire about the height of a window.
-
- Inquire about window width (FweQueryWinWidth)
- You can inquire about the width of a window.
-
- Inquire about Y position of window (FweQueryWinPosY)
- You can inquire about the Y position of a window.
-
- Inquire about X position of window (FweQueryWinPosX)
- You can inquire about the X position of a window.
-
- Inquire about edit mode of specified file (FweQueryWindowFromName)
- You can inquire about the edit mode of a specified file.
-
- Inquire about selected area (FweQuerySelecting)
- You can inquire if there is any selected text and its kind.
-
- Inquiry about line number to start selected area (FweQuerySelStartY)
- You can inquire about the line number of the first line in the selected
- area.
-
- Inquire about column number to start selected area (FweQuerySelStartX)
- You can inquire about the column number of the first column in the selected
- area.
-
- Inquire about line number to end selected area (FweQuerySelEndY)
- You can inquire about the line number of the last line in the selected
- area.
-
- Inquire about column number to end selected area (FweQuerySelEndX)
- You can inquire about the column number of the last column in the selected
- area.
-
- Inquire about clipboard data (FweQueryInClipBrd)
- You can inquire about the information on the text in the clipboard.
-
- Inquire about marked line number (FweQueryMarkLineY)
- You can inquire about the marked line number.
-
- Inquire about marked column number (FweQueryMarkLineX)
- You can inquire about the marked column number.
-
- Inquire about text code when saving (FweQueryCode)
- You can inquire about the text code of a file when saving (loading) the
- file.
-
- Inquire about environment (FweQueryOptions)
- You can inquire about the contents of the environment you have configured.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.8. Other ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The functions that control the other are listed in this page. You can see the
- functions and their movements in the following: (The words in the parentheses
- next to the names of the movements are the function names.)
-
- grep (FweGrep)
- Executes grep to search for strings in multiple files. The result will be
- displayed in another FWE window.
-
- Show function list (FweFuncList)
- Lists all the functions in the editing file. Some settings need to be
- configured before you use this function. Refer to the function search
- section to configure the settings.
-
- Jump to previous function (FweFuncPrev)
- Moves the cursor to the function that is shown before the cursor position.
- (above the cursor position on the screen.) This can be used when you edit
- a file with an extension which is related to a keyword written in a
- language such as C/C++, Java, Pascal, Basic, or Rexx in the Search
- information page of Keywords.
-
- Jump to next function (FweFuncNext)
- Moves the cursor to the function that is shown after the cursor position.
- (below the cursor position on the screen.) This can be used when you edit
- a file with an extension which is related to a keyword written in a
- language such as C/C++, Java, Pascal, Basic, or Rexx in the Search
- information page of Keywords.
-
- Executes a program (FweExecPgm)
- Executes a external program. The external programs can be specified in Set
- execute program. You can specify up to ten use-defined external programs
- with this function.
-
- Update on/off (FweEnableUpdate)
- You can set the update mode (on/off) while macros are in execution.
-
- Change text code of clipboard (FweSetInClipBrd)
- You can change the text code that is used in the clipboard.
-
- Clear virtual output console (FweClearLog)
- You can clear the contents that have been output from the REXX macros to
- the standard output (the output area of a virtual console). Or you can
- clear only the message output area without clearing the contents of the
- standard output area.
-
-